B-66102/EN10 FAPT Macro Compiler for Personal Computer

GE Fanuc Automation Europe

CNC Controls

FAPT MACRO COMPILER For PersonalComputer

Operator's Manual

B-66102EN/10

TECHNOLOGY AND MORE

Ȧ No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. Ȧ All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country from where the product is exported.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as ”impossible”.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

B–66102E/07

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed.

NOTE The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s–1

B–66102E/10

PREFACE

PREFACE

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are : Product Name

Abbreviations

FANUC Series 0–MODEL A, B, C

0–A/B/C

Series 0–A/B/C

FANUC Series 0i–MODEL A

0i–A

Series 0i–A

FANUC Series 15–MODEL A

15–A


150–A

FANUC Series 15–MODEL B

15–B


150–B

FANUC Series 15i–MA

15i–MA

FANUC Series 150i–MA

150i–MA


16–A


16–B


160–B

FANUC Series 16–MODEL C

16–C


160–C

FANUC Series 16i–A

16i–A


160i–A

FANUC Series 16i–B

16i–B


160i–B


18–A


18–B


180–B


18–C


180–C


18i–A


180i–A


18i–B


180i–B

Series 15–A

Series 15–B

Series 15

Series 15i–A Series 16–A Series 16–B

Series 16–C

Series 16

Series 16i–A

Series 16i–B Series 18–A Series 18–B

Series 18–C

Series 18

Series 18i–A

Series 18i–B

FANUC Series 20

Series 20

FANUC Series 20i

Series 20i

p–1

Series 0

Series 20

PREFACE

B–66102E/10

Product Name FANUC Series 21–TA

Abbreviations 21–TA

FANUC Series 21–TB

21–TB

FANUC Series 210–TB

210–TB

FANUC Series 21–MB

21–MB

FANUC Series 210–MB

210–MB


21i–A


210i–A


21i–B


210i–B

Series 21–A

*1 Series 21–B Series 21 Series 21i–A

Series 21i–B

*1 The Series 21–TB is available in two models: control unit A and control unit B. The manual may refer to these models as the 21–TB (controller A) or 21–TB (controller B) in those cases where their functions differ.

Other manufacturers’ products referred to in this manual

IBM and PC–DOS are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. : MS–DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft corporation. All other product names identified throughout this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. :

p–2

Table of Contents

B–66102E/10

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1 PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1 1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

1.1

FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

1.2

OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

2. EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

3.1

INSTALLING THE SYSTEM FROM THE FAPT MACRO COMPILER SYSTEM FLOPPY DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

INSTALLING THE EXECUTOR FILE FROM THE FAPT MACRO LIBRARY FLOPPY DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9

3.3

PATH SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

3.4

COMPILER SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11

3.5

SPECIFYING ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

3.2

3.5.1 3.5.2

Selecting a RS–232–C/GPIB Interface Control System (MDEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a Temporary File Output Destination (MTMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12 12

4. FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

4.1

MACRO COMPILER (MCOMP0/MCOMP15/MCOMP15I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14

4.2

MACRO LINKER (MLINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17

4.3

ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (CNC) (FOR SERIES 16/18/20/21T–A) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21

4.4

ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (FANUC PMC WRITER/FANUC FA WRITER) (FOR SERIES 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A) . . . . . . . . .

23

4.5

SERIAL INTERFACE UTILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24

4.5.1 4.5.2

4.6

Macro Program Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Program Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24 24

ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (FANUC FA WRITER, GP–IB INTERFACE) (FOR SERIES 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25

CONVERSION TO A MEMORY CARD FORMAT (MMCARD) (THIS FUNCTION IS USED IN THE SERIES 15–B/16–B/16–C/18–B/18–C/20/21–B/16i–A/18i–A/21i–A/ 16i–B/18i–B/21i–B/0i–A.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26

5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

6. RS–232–C INTERFACE SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

33

7. GP–IB INTERFACE SETTING (FOR SERIES 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A) . . . . . . . . . .

34

8. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35

9. HOW TO VIEW REFERENCE LIST/COMPILE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36

4.7

c–1

Table of Contents

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) .

39

B. COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

53

C. ROM WRITE/VERIFICATION PARAMETER TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

56

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

57

E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION GUIDE FOR THE FANUC SERIES 16/18 SUPER CAP M/SUPER CAP II M . . . . . . . . . .

79

E.1 E.2

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

80

MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

81

E.2.1 E.2.2 E.2.3 E.2.4 E.2.5

E.3

Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Source File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Conversion List File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONVERSION OF TABLE DATA WITH THE MACRO LINKER (MLINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.3.1 E.3.2 E.3.3

81 81 81 82 82

83

Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link List File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

83 83 83

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/ SUPER CAP II T WITH SERIES 16i/18i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

84

F.1

OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

85

F.2

DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

86

F.3

CAP CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

87

USER MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

88

F.4

F.4.1 F.4.2 F.4.3 F.4.4 F.4.5

F.5 F.6

88 88 89 89 89

RESTRICTIONS IMPOSED ON THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

90

CREATING SAMPLE USER MODULES FOR SUPER CAP II T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

91

F.6.1 F.6.2

F.7

Macro Libraries for Developing User Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Developing a User Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring the User Module to F–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing the User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrictions and Notes on Developing the User Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Creating Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Link Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CREATING SAMPLE USER MODULES FOR SUPER CAP II M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F.7.1 F.7.2

91 92

94

Creating Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Link Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

94 95

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR SERIES 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A) . . . . . . . . . . . .

97

G.1

OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.1.1 G.1.2

G.2

Starting the BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System File and User File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OPERATION AND CORRESPONDING SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.2.1 G.2.2

System Data Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

c–2

98 98 99

100 101 104

Table of Contents

B–66102E/10

G.2.3 G.2.4 G.2.5 G.2.6 G.2.7 G.2.8

System Data Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data Save Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRAM Data Backup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Card File Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Card Format Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

106 108 110 112 113 114

G.3

ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

115

G.4

SETTING A MACRO PASSWORD (SERIES 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

118

G.4.1 G.4.2 G.4.3 G.4.4

G.5

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a Password for the Series 20 Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FREE AREA IN FLASH MEMORY (SERIES 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.5.1

Determining the Cause of the No–space State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

118 118 119 119

120 120

H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR SERIES 16i/18i/21i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 H.1

OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H.1.1 H.1.2 H.1.3

H.2

SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H.2.1 H.2.2 H.2.3 H.2.4 H.2.5 H.2.6 H.2.7 H.2.8

H.3

Starting the Boot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Files and User Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boot Slot Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data Check Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Data Save Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRAM Data Backup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Card File Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Card Format Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Basic System Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

123 123 124 124

125 126 129 131 132 134 137 138 139

140

I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR SERIES 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, SERIES 16i/18i/21i–A/B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 I.1

OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

144

I.2

PROCESSING BY P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

145

I.2.1 I.2.2 I.2.3 I.2.4 I.2.5 I.2.6 I.2.7 I.2.8

Starting the P-code Loader Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM Initialization Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Start Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading End Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash ROM Transfer Screen (Except Series 21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash ROM Transfer End Screen (Except Series 21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

145 146 147 148 149 152 153 155

I.3

PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

156

I.4

ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

159

J. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR SERIES 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 J.1 J.2

IPL MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

161

PROCESSING FLOW FOR THE P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

162

J.2.1 J.2.2 J.2.3

RAM Initializing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

c–3

162 163 163

Table of Contents

J.2.4 J.2.5 J.2.6 J.2.7

B–66102E/10

Loading End Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu for Transferring Data into FLASH ROM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu for end of Transfer of FLASH ROM Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

164 166 167 168

J.3

PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

169

J.4

ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

172

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR SERIES 15–B/15i–A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 K.1

OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

174

K.2

MEMORY CARD SPECIFICATIONS AND RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

175

K.3

STARTING THE BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

176

K.4

REGISTERING A MEM–FORMAT FILE, STORED ON A MEMORY CARD, INTO F–ROM . .

178

K.5

SAVING A MEM–FORMAT FILE FROM F–ROM TO A MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

182

K.6

REGISTERING A ROM–FORMAT FILE, STORED ON A ROM CASSETTE, INTO F–ROM . .

184

K.7

TYPES OF FILES IN F–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

187

L. NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 M. PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 M.1

SERIES 15i COMPILE PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

192

M.2

PARAMETERS OTHER THAN SERIES 15i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

203

M.2.1 M.2.2

Compile Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executer Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

203 210

N. SUPER CAP T/SUPER CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 N.1

SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

213

N.2

COMPILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214

N.3

LINKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

215

N.4

WRITE TO THE MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

216

N.5

LOADING TO FLASH ROM MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

217

c–4

1. GENERAL

B–66102E/10

1

GENERAL

The MACRO Compiler/Executor function stores programs created using custom macros (macro programs) in ROM so that machine tool builders can implement their own conversational screens. The FAPT MACRO Compiler is a macro compiler utility to implement the MACRO Compiler/Executor function on personal computers available on the market. The FAPT MACRO Compiler is applicable to the following CNC systems: 1) Series 0 2) Series 15 3) Series 16 4) Series 18 5) Series 20 6) Series 21 This manual describes the procedure to store macro programs in ROM by using the macro compiler utility. For the syntax rule for creating macro programs, refer to the manuals listed below. 1) FANUC Series 0/0-Mate Programming Manual (Macro compiler/Macro executor) (B-61393E-1) 2) FANUC Series 15 Programming Manual (Macro compiler/Macro executor) (B-61213E-1) 3) FANUC Series 15–MODEL B Programming Manual (Macro Compiler/Macro executor) (B–62073E–2) 4) FANUC Series 0i/16/18/20/21 Programming Manual (Macro compiler/Macro executor) (B-61803E-1) 5) FANUC Series 15i–MODEL A Programming Manual (Macro Compiler/Macro executor) (B–63323EN–2)

1

1. GENERAL

B–66102E/10

1.1 FEATURES

(1) Macro programs can be edited using a commercially available screen editor that operates under the MS-DOS environment. (2) The symbolic macro compiler function allows macro programs to be coded in symbolic format, and also allows comments to be coded. (3) A program that references macro variables in array format can be created. (4) Compile list output makes macro program development, debugging, and maintenance much easier. (5) A linker (linkage editing) function is employed which allows partial compilation and also facilitates the development and maintenance of macro programs common to several models. (6) The macro compiler utility, used with the CNC executor RAM operation function, can transfer a ROM-format file to the CNC system. This capability allows macro programs to be developed and debugged without writing ROM. (7) Linker output (ROM-format file) operation is separated from writing to a macro ROM by the ROM file transmitter with the FANUC PMC-Writer/FA-Writer. With this feature, the same macro ROM can be created at any time by preserving ROM-format files. (8) A ROM file transmitter function based on the GP-IB interface allows connection to the FANUC FA Writer for high-speed writing to a macro ROM verification.

2

1. GENERAL

B–66102E/10

1.2 OVERVIEW

The FAPT MACRO Compiler/Executor function enables the FANUC CNC users to develop their own macro programs in a macro language, store the macro programs in ROM as a macro ROM by using the macro compiler, and execute the macro programs with the macro executor function of the FANUC CNC systems. (See the conceptual diagram on the next page.) The macro compiler utility enables macro program development, compilation, and writing to a macro ROM on a personal computer operating under the MS-DOS or PC-DOS. The macro compiler utility functions are listed below. (1) Macro compiler D Symbolic macro program analysis D Macro program compilation D Object program output D Reference list/compile list output (2) Macro linker D Linkage editing of specified object programs and macro executor/compile parameters D ROM-format file output D Link list output (3) ROM file transmitter (CNC) D ROM-format file transfer to the CNC D Macro executor RAM operation (4) ROM file transmitter (FANUC PMC Writer/FANUC FA Writer) D Writing ROM-format files to a macro cassette D Verifying a macro cassette against the ROM-format files (5) Serial interface utility D Reading/transferring programs from the CNC/FANUC SYSTEM P (6) ROM file transmitter (FANUC FA Writer (GP-IB interface) D Writing ROM-format files to a macro cassette D Verifying a macro cassette against the ROM-format files (7) Memory card format conversion D Converting macro programs to a format capable of accepting write from a memory card The macro compiler utility is distributed with a 5-inch (2HD) floppy disk as an MS-DOS/PC-DOS package utility. The utility does not provide functions such as those for editing macro programs, and saving and restoring programs to and from floppy disks. For these functions, use MS-DOS/PC-DOS commands and editors available on the market.

3

1. GENERAL

B–66102E/10

*

Create a macro program using an editor. (An editor is not supplied.)

*

The macro program (source file) must be in standard MS-DOS text format.

*

The macro compiler generates an object file. It also creates reference and compile lists at the same time as the object file.

*

The object file is linked based on a link control file to generate a ROM-format file. The editor creates the link control file (xx.MEX).

MS-DOS Editor

Macro Program (Source file)

MCOMP0 MCOMP15 MCOMP15I MACRO Compiler (xx.LNK)

(xx.REL)

LINK Control file

Macro Program (Obj file)

MLINK MLINK15I

* MACRO Linker

Macro Library file

FANUC supplies a macro library for each CNC model.

(xx.ROM) *

The ROM-format file contains macros in binary form output by the linker for a macro cassette.

ROM format file

MTRNSC

MMCARD MMCARD15 MMCARD15I

MROMWT /MROMVF

ROM file Transmitter

RS-232-C line CNC Series 16/18/20/21-TA RAM Operation

*

· The file is transferred to CNC through RS-232-C to execute RAM operation (Series 16/18/20/21-TA).

Memory Card file Converter

RS-232-C line GP-IB I/F

The ROM format file is executed on the CNC using the following methods:

(xx.MEM)

FANUC PMC Writer FA Writer

Memory Card Reader /Writer

Macro cassette

Memory Card

· The file is transferred to FANUC PMC Writer/ FA Writer, written in macro cassetter or ROM, then executed (Series 0/15-A/16-A/18-A). · The file is converted in Memory card format, transferred to CNC from memory card, then executed (Series 15-B/16-B/18-B/16-C/18-C /20/21–B/15i–A/16i–A/18i–A/21i–A/16i–B/ 18i–B/21i–B).

Fig.1.2 MACRO Compiler Utility Function Conceptual Diagram

4

2. EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

B–66102E/10

2

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

(1) Personal computer:

Main memory OS

(FMR/PC98) (PC-AT)

(Fujitsu : FMR Series) (NEC : PC98 Series) (IBM : PC-AT Series) 640K bytes or more

MS-DOS Version 3.1 and later PC-DOS Version 3.3 and later

Hard disk

About 1M bytes is required for install the system (Caution 1)

Floppy disk drive

5-inch floppy disk drive (2HD) 3.5-inch floppy disk drive (2HD) for 15i/16i/18i/21i (Caution 2)

Serial interface

RS-232-C serial interface

Miscellaneous (Option)

Printer (Note 1) GP-IB interface (Note 2)

(2) FANUC PMC-Writer or FANUC FA-Writer Serial interface (RS-232-C) GP-IB interface (option/FANUC FA-Writer only) CAUTION 1 The macro compiler utility software is installed on hard disk. This software occupies a hard disk space of about 1M bytes. In addition, developed macro programs and list files/object files generated at compile time are output as files on hard disk. So the size of hard disk depends on the macro programs developed. 2 The macro compiler utility software is distributed with a 5-inch (2HD) or 3.5-inch (2HD) floppy disk for series 15i/16i/18i/21i floppy disk. The macro executor is also distributed with a 5-inch (2HD) or 3.5-inch (2HD) floppy disk for series 15i/16i/18i/21i floppy disk. A 5-inch or 3.5-inch floppy disk drive is needed to install the system and executor files.

NOTE 1 The macro compiler and macro linker output a reference list, compile list, and link list as MS-DOS text files to hard disk. For output to the printer, use an MS-DOS/PC-DOS command. Text files are output in a format assuming an 80-character, 60-line printer. 2 The FANUC FA-Writer allows high-speed writing to ROM/verification based on the GP-IB interface. (Note that only NEC PC98 Series and IBM PC-AT Sereis currently supports this function.)

5

3. SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)

3

B–66102E/10

SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)

The FAPT MACRO Compiler software is distributed with two 5-inch (2HD) floppy disks or 3.5-inch (2HD) floppy disk for series 15i/16i/18i/21i. To use the software, load the software to the hard disk from the system floppy disks. No.

Name

1

FAPT MACRO Compiler system floppy disk

2

FAPT MACRO Library system floppy disk

To install the system, some knowledge of the hardware and software of a personal computer to be used is needed. In particular, the user should be familiar with the handling of basic MS-DO/PC-DOS commands and files such as CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT.

6


B–66102E/10

3.1 INSTALLING THE SYSTEM FROM THE FAPT MACRO COMPILER SYSTEM FLOPPY DISK

Examples

This operation installs the FAPT MACRO Compiler system software on the hard disk. First set the FAPT MACRO Compiler system floppy disk in the floppy disk drive, then activate MSETUP.BAT on the floppy disk. > ?: \ > MSETUP

: The root directory of the system floppy disk contains MSETUP.BAT. : Specify the name of the drive containing the system floppy disk. : Specify the drive name of the hard disk to hold the system. ? :

The system floppy disk is set in drive B:, and the system is installed on the hard disk of drive A:. > B: \ > MSETUP B: A:

This operation creates the following directories in drive A:, and the system software and a sample program are copied to the hard disk. A:\MCOMP

\TOOL \MEX \USR

Explanation of the directories

\SAMPL

a) \MCOMP\TOOL The FAPT MACRO Compiler system software, batch files, document files, and so forth are stored under this directory. MCOMP0.EXE/MCOMP15.EXE/MLINK.EXE/ !System software RSFMR.BAT !RS-232-C setting batch file for Fujitsu FMR Series RSPC98.BAT !RS-232-C setting batch file for NEC PC98 Series RSPCAT.BAT !RS-232-C setting batch file for IBM PC-AT Series SYSTEM.DEF !System common symbol definition file (for $INCLUDE) b) \MCOMP\MEX Library file is stored under this directory. This file is loaded from the FAPT MACRO Library floppy disk. c) \MCOMP\USR Under this directory, create directories used to develop macro programs. A:\MCOMP

\TOOL \MEX \USR

\SAMPL \MODEL-A \MODEL-B \MODEL-C

7


B–66102E/10

d) \MCOMP\USR\SAMPL Under this directory, the files including such a link control file, compiler/link result files, and program files as described in Appendix D are stored. Use these files as reference information for development.

8


B–66102E/10

3.2 INSTALLING THE EXECUTOR FILE FROM THE FAPT MACRO LIBRARY FLOPPY DISK

Examples

This operation loads the executor file under the library directory of the FAPT MACRO Compiler system installed by the operation of Section 3.1. As with the FAPT MACRO Compiler system floppy disk, set the FAPT MACRO Library floppy disk in the floppy disk drive, then activate ESETUP.BAT on the executor floppy disk. > ?:\>ESETUP

: The root directory of the library floppy disk contains ESETUP.BAT. : Specify the name of the drive containing the library floppy disk. : Specify the drive name of the hard disk holding the system. ? :

Set the library floppy disk in drive B:, and the library file is stored in the system installed on the hard disk of drive A:. > B:\>ESETUP B: A:

9


3.3 PATH SETTING

B–66102E/10

All system software is contained under the \MCOMP\TOOL directory. So specify this directory by path setting with AUTOEXEC.BAT.

10


B–66102E/10

3.4 COMPILER SERIES

To match the CNC series, there are three types of the FAPT MACRO Compiler system: a) For Series 0/Series 16/Series 18/Series 20/Series 21 b) For Series 15–A/15–B c) For Series 15i–A These Compiler systems are for the respective series only. Compiling the same macro program using these compiler systems generates different object codes. For this reason, be sure to use the execution files (macro compiler/linker/memory card converter) and library files suitable to the development model. (The library file names are given in Appendix L.) If multiple systems are to be installed on the same personal computer, it is recommended that a separate directory be used for each CNC series. CNC Series and Corresponding Software (See also Fig. 4.7.) CNC series

Macro compiler

0/16/18/20/21

MCOMP0

15–A/15–B

MCOMP15

15i–A

MCOMP15I

Macro linker MLINK MLINK15I

Memory card format converter MMCARD*1 MMCARD15*2 MCARD15I

*1 MMCARD is for the Series 16–B/16–C/16i–A/16i–B/18–B/18C/18i–A/18i–B/20/ 21–B/21i–A/21i–B/0i–A only. *2 MMCARD15 is for the Series 15–B only.

11


B–66102E/10

3.5 SPECIFYING ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES 3.5.1 Selecting a RS–232–C/GPIB Interface Control System (MDEV)

A macro program or a ROM-format file is transferred via the RS-232-C/GPIB interface. The interface control systems vary between personal computer manufacturers. Control software including MPOUT, MROMWT, and MROMWTG is therefore designed to determine the control system according to the setting of the MDEV environment variable. Specify the MDEV environment variable as follows in AUTOEXEC.BAT before using control software. Setting of the MDEV environment variable set MDEV=PC98 : For the NEC PC98 Series set MDEV=FMR : For the Fujitsu FMR Series set MDEV=IBM : For the IBM PC Series When no MDEV environment variable is specified, control software runs in the control system for the NEC PC98 Series.

3.5.2 Specifying a Temporary File Output Destination (MTMP)

The macro compiler or macro linker generates or deletes some temporary files (work files) for compiling or linking. The destination to which the temporary files are output can be specified with the MTMP environment variable. Setting of the MTMP environment variable set MTMP=B:\TEMP

If the temporary file output destination is specified as a RAM disk, compiling or linking time can be reduced. When no MTMP environment variable is specified, temporary files are generated in the current directory for compiling or linking and deleted after compiling or linking

12

4. FUNCTIONS

B–66102E/10

4

FUNCTIONS

13

4. FUNCTIONS

B–66102E/10

4.1 MACRO COMPILER (MCOMP0/MCOMP15/ MCOMP15i)

(1) Operation The macro compiler can compile macro programs created in the MS-DOS text file format. The macro compiler outputs an object file for the macro linker, reference list file, and compile list file. *1

*2

A:\> MCOMP0 file-spec [parameters] ==> (For Series 0/16/18/20/21) A:\> MCOMP15 file-spec [parameters] ==> (For Series 15–A/B) A:\> MCOMP15I file-spec [parameters] ==> (For Series 15i–A)

Source File

Object File

Macro Program

Object MCOMP0 MCOMP15 MCOMP15I

Program

(xx.SRC)

(xx.REL)

Reference List File(xx.REF) Compile List File (xx.LST) MACRO COMPILER 1 O0001; 2 #100=#101+10;

*1 file-spec This specifies a macro program source file. The extension of a source file name must be .SRC. Source files to be compiled can be specified in three ways: (1) Compilation of a single file A:\> MCOMP0 ABC=> Compiles ABC.SRC. (2) Compilation of multiple cards by using a wild card A:\> MCOMP0 ABC*=>

Compiles all files whose names start with ABC and have the extension .SRC, (3) Selective compilation according to link control file specification A:\> MCOMP0 @ABC=>

Compiles all files specified in the link control file (file name: ABC.LNK). CAUTION As described in Section 3.4, even if the same macro program is compiled, the macro compiler for Series 0/16/18/20/21 creates an object file different from an object file created by the macro compiler for Series 15 and Series 15i. Select the compiler that matches a development model.

14

4. FUNCTIONS

B–66102E/10

*2 [parameters] This specifies compile conditions. –NR : Outputs no object file. If this parameter is omitted, an object file with the extension .REL is output. –L1 : Outputs no compile list file. If this parameter is omitted, a compile list file with the extension .LST is output. –L2 : Outputs no reference list file. If this parameter is omitted, a reference list file with the extension .REF is output. –L3 : Outputs a macro program file. If this parameter is omitted, no macro program file is output. A macro program file is output with the extension .PRG. –PR : Makes no symbolic macro program analysis. Specify this parameter when a program coded in standard macro program format is to be compiled. No reference list file is output. Even if this parameter is not specified, a macro program can be compiled without trouble. However, this parameter can save time required to make a symbolic macro program analysis and can also save space for reference list file output. –Fo : Specifies a destination to which an object file is output. See item (7). –Fr : Specifies a destination to which a reference list file is output. –Fl : Specifies a destination to which a compile list file is output. –Fp : Specifies a destination to which a macro program file is output. (2) Macro program source file A macro program source file must be created in MS-DOS text file format. At this time, be sure to assign the file name extension .SRC. The macro compiler can compile a macro program coded in symbolic format. For detailed information, see Chapter 5. The macro compiler can also compile a program coded in standard macro program format. In this case, specify the command parameter -PR. This parameter can save time required to make a symbolic macro program analysis and can also save space for reference list file output. (3) Object file An object file output by the compiler is subject to processing by the macro linker. The name of an object file is the same as the source file name, except that the extension .REL is assigned to the object file. (4) Reference list file The reference list file is a list file output from macro program analysis processing. A source program, errors, error codes, symbol name cross reference information are listed. The name of a reference list file is the same as the source file name, except that the extension .REF is assigned to the reference list file. For output to a printer, for example, use a standard MS-DOS command. 15

4. FUNCTIONS

B–66102E/10

(5) Compile list file A compile list file is output as a result of macro program compilation after symbolic macro program analysis. A source program, errors, error codes, variable cross reference information, object file size information, and so forth are listed. The name of a compile list file is the same as the source file name, except that the extension .LST is assigned to the compile list file. For output to a printer, for example, use a standard MS-DOS command. (6) Macro program file By specifying the command parameter -L3, a macro program after macro program analysis processing can be preserved as a file. The name of a macro program file is the same as the source file name, except that the extension .PRG is assigned to the macro program file. By using the serial interface utility described in Section 4.5, this file can be output to the CNC/FANUC SYSTEM P via a RS-232-C line. (7) Specifying the destinations to which the compiler outputs files The directory of the destinations to which the compiler outputs files can be specified as desired according to compiling conditions. However, this function is only effective for FAPT MACRO Compiler Version 02.1 and later versions. –Fo : Specifies a destination to which an object file is output. –Fr : Specifies a destination to which a reference list file is output. –Fl : Specifies a destination to which a compile list file is output. –Fp : Specifies a destination to which a macro program file is output. Example) Compiling TEST.SRC and outputting TEST.REL to B:\OBJ MCOMP0 TEST -FoB:\OBJ

16

4. FUNCTIONS

B–66102E/10

4.2 MACRO LINKER (MLINK)

(1) Operation According to the specification in a link control file created beforehand, the macro linker creates a link list file and ROM-format file for creating a desired macro cassette. *1 *2 A:\> MLINK file-spec [parameters] ==> (For Series 0/16/18/20/21/15–A/15–B) A:\> MLINK15I file-spec [parameters] ==> (For Series 15i–A)

Link control File

Link Control

ROM Format File

ROM File

MLINK MLINK15I

(xx.LNK)

(xx.ROM)

Object File

Link List File(xx.MAP)

Object Program

MACRO LINKER prog. 1 O0001 2 O0002

(xx.REL)

Size. 00100H 00200H

Macro Library file (xx.MEX)

*1 file-spec This specifies a link control file created in a specified format beforehand. The extension of a link control file name must be .LNK. *2 [parameters] This specifies link conditions. –NR : Outputs no ROM-format file. If this parameter is omitted, a ROM-format file with the extension .ROM is output. –NL : Outputs no link list file. If this parameter is omitted, a link list file with the extension .MAP is output. –Fm : Specifies the destination to which a link list file is output. See item (4). –Fr : Specifies the destination to which a ROM-format file is output

17

4. FUNCTIONS

B–66102E/10

(2) Link control file The link control file specifies a library file name, compile parameters, and object file names subject to linkage. As with a source file, a link control file must be created in MS-DOS text file format. At this time, be sure to assign the file name extension .LNK. In a link control file, a library file name, compile parameters, and object file names subject to linkage are defined using keywords. A comment line can be provided by using /:. Keyword) CNC= CNC2= CNC3= P9999= FILE=

: : : : :

1st library file name for each CNC model See Appendix 2nd library file name for each CNC model L for details. 3rd library file name for each CNC model Compile parameters 9000 to 9059 Object file (Multiple object files can be specified with each name delimited by a comma.) HFILE= : Intel 32-bit hexadecimal file (Multiple object files can be specified with each name delimited by a comma.) SYSTEM= : path–name (Series 16i/18i/21i/15i) SYSTEM value

Specified path

MPATH1

First path of M series

MPATH2

Second path of M series

TPATH1

First path of T series

TPATH2

Second path of T series

LPATH1

First path of loader

* MPATH1 is fixed for series 15i–A

Example) /: /: MACRO COMPILER UTILITY LINK FILE (SAMPLE) /: /: FOR F16MB CNC=A:\MCOMP\MEX\F16MB_07.MEX /: P9000=00010000 P9010=100 P9037=5 P9038=8000 /: JIKKOU-MACRO FILE=ABC,DEF FILE=XYZ,UVW /: TAIWA-MACRO FILE=SSS

The example above is for Series 16–MB. The compile parameters (Nos. 9000. 9010, 9037, and 9038) are set, and the object files (ABC.REF. DEF.REL, XYZ.REL, UVW.REL, and SSS.REL) are linked.

The specification of (=0) is assumed for those compile parameters that are not specified in the link control file. A link control file is used also as a selective compile control file by the macro compiler, as described in item (1) in Section 4.1. This function is useful in compiling all programs to be linked. A:\> MCOMP0 @ABS ⇒ compiles all files specified in the link control file (file name: ABC.LNK). 18

4. FUNCTIONS

B–66102E/10

(3) Link list file The link list file is output by the linker, and a library name, compile parameters, compile program list and size information, erroneous program numbers, error codes, ROM-format file size information and so forth are listed. The name of a link list file is the same as the link control file name, except that the extension .MAP is assigned to the link list file name. For output to a printer, for example, use a standard MS-DOS command. (4) Specifying the destinations to which the macro linker outputs files The directory of the destinations to which the macro linker outputs files can be specified as desired according to linking conditions. NOTE This function is effective only for FAPT MACRO Compiler Version 02.1 and later versions. –Fm : Specifies a destination to which a link list file is output. –Fr : Specifies a destination to which a ROM-format file is output. Example: Generating SAMPL.MAP to directory B:\MAP and SAMPL.ROM to directory C:\ROM MLINK SAMPL -FmB:\MAP -FrC:\ROM

(5) Checking the size of ROM format file (Exclusive for Series 16-B/C, 18-B/C, 21-B, 16i–A/B, 18i–A/B, 21i–A/B, 0i–A and 15i–A) at linking macro A ROM format file that is created by linking (MLINK) is checked for its size whether it is overflown or not. The size of ROM format file is set by compile parameter No. 9000 and 9001 (No.8500 for series15i–A). If a prepared ROM format file may exceed the size that was set by compile parameter 9000 (No.8500 for series15i) and 9001 as a result of linking, an error is produced when the macro linker is executed. ERROR : ROM size over Bit No. Address Compile parameter

9000 Address

Compile parameter

#7

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

M3MB

M2MB

M1MB

M512

M256

M128

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

9001

#0

#0

M4MB

M4MB

M3MB

M2MB

M1MB

M512

M256

M128

4.0MB

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

3.0MB

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

2.0MB

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1.0MB

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

512KB

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

256KB

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

128KB

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

19

4. FUNCTIONS

B–66102E/10

NOTE 1 For the 21-TB (Controller A), always specify 128 KB. 2 For the Series 16, a 128-KB ROM-format file cannot be specified. 3 For the 21-MB or 21-TB (Controller B), no more than 1.0 MB can be specified. 4 For the 0i–A, no more than 512 KB can be specified. D Series 15i–A Bit No. Address Compile parameter

#7

#6

8500

#5 R10

R10

R05

1.0MB 512KB

1 0

0 1

256KB

0

0

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

R05

NOTE For the Series 15i–A, only the combinations given in the table above are possible. (6) Error messages 1) When the Series 16i/18i/21i–A Macro library is linked using a macro linker (MLINK.EXE) of MACRO COMPILER version 03.2 or earlier, the following error will occur: ERROR:

Executer#1 is not specified

2) When the SYSTEM keyword is not specified, the following error will occur: ERROR:

20

Can not find SYSTEM define

4. FUNCTIONS

B–66102E/10

4.3 ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (CNC) (FOR Series 16/18/20/21T–A)

A linked ROM-format file can be transferred to CNC memory via a RS-232-C line, and whether the created ROM-format file operates correctly can be checked using the macro executor RAM operation function of the CNC system. NOTE The Series 0i–A or Series 21–B does not support this function. (1) Operation After placing the CNC system in the macro executor receive ready state, a linked ROM-format file is transferred with the following command: A:\> MTRNSC file-spec parameters -F -S

*1 file-spec This specifies a ROM-format file to be transferred. *2 parameters CNC model

Number of address bits

Addressing

Series 16

32

00800000

Series 18

24

800000

Series 20

24

980000

Series 21-TA

24

3A0000

–F : Overwriting loader command (See item (3).) –S : Not required in the Series 16/18–A. Example: The file SAMPL.ROM is transferred to Series 16-A. A:\> MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000

(2) RS-232-C interface For transfer, the RS-232-C serial interface channel at standard port No. 0 is used. Before a RS-232–C interface can be used, it must be set and initialized according to the conditions below. Transfer rate : Value set with the connected CNC system Data length : 7 bits Parity : Enable/even parity Stop bit : Value set with the connected CNC system Xon/off control applied For detailed information, see Chapter 6. (3) Overwriting loader command effective Only a user macro program can be transferred (execution of the overwriting loader function ) by specifying the transfer parameter. First all the files are transferred once, then only the changed user macro program is transferred. This enables the macro program to be debugged. (This function is only effective for FAPT MACRO Compiler Version 02.1 and later versions.) Example) MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000 -F

–F : Overwriting loader command When this command is specified, only the macro program (P-code program) is transferred from the ROM-format file; execution control software (executor) is not transferred. 21

4. FUNCTIONS

B–66102E/10

a) Activate the P-code loader function in the initialization loader function mode specified for the CNC (bit 1 of parameter No. 8701 = 0) to transfer all files from the personal computer. MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000

b) Debug the macro program. c) If an error is found, correct the macro program and compile or link the macro program to create the ROM-format file again. d) Activate the P-code loader function in the overwriting loader function mode specified for the CNC (bit 1 of parameter No. 8701 = 1). Specifying -F transfers the macro program from the personal computer. MTRNSC SAMPL.ROM 32 00800000 -F

Repeat steps b), c), and d) to debug the macro program. If the library to be linked has been modified according to the software revision, the above procedure must be followed again from step a), transferring all files.

22

4. FUNCTIONS

B–66102E/10

4.4 ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (FANUC PMC WRITER/FANUC FA WRITER) (FOR Series 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A)

(1) Operation A linked ROM-format file is transferred to the FANUC PMC Writer or FANUC FA Writer via a RS-232-C line, and is written to a macro ROM and verified. A:\> MROMWT file-spec parameters

Write or write/verification A:\> MROMVF file-spec parameters

Verification *1 file-spec This specifies a ROM-format file to be transferred. *2 parameters -K1xx : Cassette type (1) -K2xx : Cassette type (2) -IDxxxx: ID code -VCxx : Sets Vcc (with MROMWT only). -VPxx : Sets Vpp (with MROMWT only). -Pxx : Sets pulse width (with MROMWT only). -VF : Writes a ROM-format file, then verifies it (with MROMWT only). For detailed information, see Appendix C. Example: The file SAMPL.ROM is written to a Series 0 512K-byte ROM cassette, then is verified. A:\> MROMWT SAMPL.ROM –K110 –K223 –ID50B2 –VCC0 –VP64 -P01 -VF

(2) RS-232-C interface For detailed information, see Chapter 6.

23

4. FUNCTIONS

B–66102E/10

4.5 SERIAL INTERFACE UTILITY 4.5.1 Macro Program Input

(1) Operation A macro program is read from the CNC/SYSTEM P via a RS-232-C line, then is stored in an MS-DOS text file for the macro compiler. A macro program is transferred from the CNC/SYSTEM P after the command below is entered and the personal computer is placed in receive ready state. A:\> MPLOADA file-spec

1* file-spec This specifies the name of a text file for storing a macro program. Example: A macro program is read to A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\ABC.SRC. A:\> MPLOADA A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\ABC.SRC

CAUTION Select the ISO code as output code when transferring a macro program from the CNC/SYSTEM P.

4.5.2 Macro Program Output

(1) Operation A macro program output with the parameter -L3 described in Section 4.1 can be output to the CNC/SYSTEM P via a RS-232-C line. After the CNC/SYSTEM P is placed in program read ready state, a macro program is transferred by the command below. A:\> MPOUT file-spec parameters

*1 file-spec This specifies a macro program file to be transferred. *2 parameters –Fffff : Outputs fields (null code) before and after a macro program. By ffff, specify the number of fields to be output. –CR

: Specifies the output format of the EOB (;). When -CR is omitted:The EOB (;) is converted to LF(0AH)/CR(0DH)/CR(0DH). When -CR is specified:The EOB (;) is converted to LF(0AH).

(2) RS-232-C interface For detailed information, see Chapter 6.

24

4. FUNCTIONS

B–66102E/10

4.6 ROM–FORMAT FILE TRANSMITTER (FANUC FA WRITER, GP–IB INTERFACE) (FOR Series 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A)

(1) Operation A linked ROM-format file is transferred to the FANUC FA Writer via a GP-IB interface, and is written to a macro cassette and verified. Since a linked ROM-format file is transferred to the FANUC FA Writer via a GP-IN interface, the file can be written to a macro cassette and verified at higher speed than when the file is transferred via a RS-232-C line (Section 4.4). A:\> MROMWTG file-spec parameters

Write or write/verification A:\> MROMVFG file-spec parameters

Verification *1 file-spec This specifies a ROM-format file to be transferred. *2 parameters -K1xx : Cassette type (1) -K2xx : Cassette type (2) -IDxxxx : ID code -VCxx : Sets Vcc (with MROMWTG only). -VPxx : Sets Vpp (with MROMWTG only). -Pxx

: Sets pulse width (with MROMWTG only).

-VF

: Writes a ROM-format file, then verifies it (with MROMWTG only).

For detailed information, see Appendix C. Example: The file SAMPL.ROM is written to a Series 0 512K-byte ROM cassette, then is verified. A:\> MROMWTG SAMPL.ROM -K110 -K223 -ID50B2 -VCC0 -VP64 -P01 -VF

(2) GP-IB interface For detailed information, see Chapter 7.

25

4. FUNCTIONS

B–66102E/10

4.7 CONVERSION TO A MEMORY CARD FORMAT (MMCARD) (THIS FUNCTION IS USED IN THE Series 15–B/16–B/16–C/18–B /18–C/20/21–B/ 16i–A/18i–A/21i–A/ 16i–B/18i–B/21i–B/ 0i–A.)

(1) Operation Convert a ROM-format file created by the macro linker (MLINK) to the memory-card format file which can be loaded from the memory card using the boot function of the Series 15-B/16-B/20. A:\> MMCARD file-spec (Series 16–B/16–C/18–B/18–C/20/21-B/ 16i–A/16i–B/18i–A/18i–B/21i–A/21i–B) A:\> MMCARD15 file–spec (Series 15–B)

*1 file-spec This specifies a ROM-format File to be converted without extension. The name of MEM-format file is the same as ROM-format File name with the extension .MEM. Example: A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\SAMPL.ROM is converted into A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\SAMPL.MEM. A:\> MMCARD15 A:\MCOMP\USR\TEST\SAMPL

Series 16-B/16–C/18-B/ 18–C/20/21-B/ 16i–A/16i–B/18i–A/ 18i–B/21i–A/21i–B Source File

MCOMP0

Object File

Macro Program (xxx.SRC)

MCOMP15

Object Program (xxx.REL)

(Sereis 15-B) MCOMP15I Series 15–B/16–B/16–C/ 18–B/18–C/20/21-B/ 16i–A/16i–B/18i–A/ 18i–B/21i–A/21i–B

(Sereis 15i–A) Link Control File

MLINK

Link Control (xxx.LNK)

ROM File (xxx.ROM)

MLINK15I (Sereis 15i–A)

Macro Library File Macro Library (xxx.MEX)

MMCARD

MMCARD15

MMCARD15I

Series 16-B/16–C/18-B/ 18–C/20/21-B/ 16i–A/16i–B/18i–A/ 18i–B/21i–A/21i–B/ 0i–A

(Sereis 15-B)

(Sereis 15i–A)

To memory card COPY A:xxx.MEM F: (F: Memory card device number)

Memory Card File Memory Card File (xxx.MEM)

Memory Card

26

5. SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM

B–66102E/10

5

SYMBOLIC MACRO PROGRAM

A macro program is to be created according the rule described below. (1) A macro program must start with address O. Address % must be specified at the end of the file. Multiple programs can be coded in a single file. At this time, the start of each program can be identified by address O. Data after address %, if any, is ignored. When multiple programs are coded, address % must be coded at the end. O0001 #101=1; G00 X#101; : O0002 G243 X0 YX (ABS); #500=#501+#502; : %

(2) One line can contain only one block. The end of block (EOB) is represented by a semicolon (;). All data after a semicolon on a line is regarded as a comment. #100=#101; COMMENT G00 X123. Y234. ; G01 ; => ”G01 ;” after ; is regarded as comment. (3) All data after /: is regarded as a comment. A line starting with /* is regarded as a comment line; such a line is not compiled. /: comment

=> Compiler ignores this line as comment line.

/: comment /: O0001 ; /: comment

=> Compiler ignores this line as comment line.

G00 ...; ;/: comment

=> Blank block containing only ; is created.

M99; %

(4) Programming using symbolic names A symbolic name can be defined for a variable, expression, or character string to allow programming using symbolic names. A symbolic name can be defined as described below.

27


B–66102E/10

Symbolic name definition @xxxx

yyyyyy

xxxx: Symbolic name (String of alphanumeric characters beginning with an alphabetic character) Version of the compiler

Version 1.4 or previous versions

Version 2.1 or subsequent versions

8

32

Maximum number of characters

yyyyyy: Definition character string (not longer than 80 characters) After a symbolic name is defined, the symbolic name used in a program is replaced by the corresponding definition character string. Example) @COUNT1 #100 @ON =1 @OFF =0 @CURSOR #8505 @RETURN M99 /: O0001 ; CURSOR ON ; COUNT1 = COUNT1+1 ; RETURN ;

==>> O0001 ; #8505 =1 ; #100 = #100+1 ; M99 ;

(5) Symbolic name for sequence number A symbolic name can be assigned to a sequence number as described below. In (4) above, a symbolic name is just used for a definition character string. On the other hand, a symbolic name for a sequence number is regarded as a sequence number when it is coded at the start of a block, and is regarded as a jump (GOTO) destination number when it is coded at a position other than the start of a block. Definition of symbolic name for sequence number >xxxx 9999

xxxx: Symbolic name for sequence number (String of alphanumeric characters beginning with an alphabetic character) Version of the compiler Maximum number of characters

Version 1.4 or previous versions

Version 2.1 or subsequent versions

8

32

9999: Number (not longer than four digits) After a symbolic name is defined, the symbolic name used in a program is replaced by the corresponding sequence number.

28


B–66102E/10

Example) @COUNT1 #100 >JUMP1 100 >SKIP 200 /: O0002 ; ==> GOTO JUMP1 ; IF[COUNT1 LE 0]GOTO SKIP ; SKIP ; JUMP1 M99 ;

O0002 ; GOTO 100 ; IF[#100 LE 0]GOTO 200 ; N200 ; N100 M99 ;

(6) Automatic conversion of hiragana and kanji codes Hiragana and kanji, when coded in quotation marks and parentheses as (’ ’), can be auto-matically converted to internal macro compiler codes by coding. ’) ==> (:3929 3671 3872 3439 (’ 2437 245E 2439:)

Kanji and hiragana must be coded using full-size characters, and alphanumeric characters, spaces, special symbols must be coded using half-size characters. Specifying a compiling condition as -FS0 enables the characters usable in the Series 0 to be checked. When -FS0 is specified, the characters unusable in the Series 0 cause a compiling error. (This specification is only effective for FAPT MACRO Compiler Version 02.1 and later versions.) MCOMP0 TEST -FS0

(7) Reference to external file ($INCLUDE control statement) By using the $INCLUDE control statement, a program, symbol definition, and so forth contained in a separate file can be referenced. With this function, definitions and processing common to multiple programs can be specified in a separate file so that each program file can reference those definitions and processing. Example) Program file /: $INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF /: O0003 ; ==> O0003 ; TAIWAP1 =5 ; #8500 =5 ; RETURN ; M99 ; Include file (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) /: @TAIWAP1 #8500 @RETURN M99 /:

29


B–66102E/10

(8) Array variable coding Variables can be used as a one-dimensional array by using a simple coding method. Coding method #999 999: Number of first variable in array By this coding method, variables can be referenced or written to as array data with an index indicated by the expression and starting with the variable specified in 999. #100 is equivalent to #[100+#101]. (9) Reference list page eject control ($EJECT control statement) By using the $EJECT control statement, reference list page eject operation can be freely controlled. Example) Program file /: $EJECT ⇐ Advances reference list page. /: O0003 ; D D

(10)Enhancement of IF and WHILE statements The IF and WHILE statements have been enhanced. (a) Determination of an operation result Only an operation expression can be specified as the condition of the IF or WHILE statement. The execution of the IF or WHILE statement is controlled depending on whether the operation result is equal to 0. Format: WHILE[operation-expression] DOx ; ENDx ; IF[operation-expression] GOTO xxx ; IF[operation-expression] THEN;

Example) The left macro instructions are equivalent to the right macro instructions. WHILE[#100]DO1; å WHILE[#100 NE 0]DO1; D

D

D

D

END1;

END1;

IF[#100+#101]GOTO123; å IF[[#100+#101]NE 0 ]GOTO123; IF[SIN[#1]]THEN #1=0; å IF [SIN[#1] NE 0] THEN #1=0 ;

(b) Logical operations, AND and OR Multiple conditions can be specified in an IF statement. The conditions ANDed or ORed control the execution of the IF statement. Format : IF[&&]GOTO xxx; IF[||]THEN ;

An AND is represented with an && sign and OR with an ££ sign. Up to three ANDs or ORs can be specified in a single IF statement. However, an AND and OR must not be specified together in a single IF statement. 30


B–66102E/10

IF[&&&&&& ] THEN; IF[|||||| ]GOTO xxx; IF[&&||] GOTO xxx ;

–OK –OK –NG

Example) IF[#100 EQ 1 && #101 GT 0] GOTO 100 ; IF[#100 E Q1 ||#101 NE 1 || #102 GT 10 ] THEN #102=1 ;

(c) IF/THEN/ELSE/ENDIF The syntax of an IF statement has been enhanced. Structured programming is possible using IF/THEN/ELSE/ENDIF. The following shows the formats of syntactically valid IF statements. IF[...]GOTO 999 ; IF[...]THEN Macro-st ; IF[...]THEN Macro-st; *Macro-st: ELSE Macro-st; Macro statement IF[...]THEN ; Statement ; D

*Statement:

Macro or NC statement

D

ENDIF ; IF[...]THEN ; Statement ; D D

ELSE ; Statement ; D D

ENDIF ;

a) When only a single macro statement is to be executed, the macro statement can be specified immediately after THEN/ELSE as shown in and . IF[#100 EQ 0] THEN #101 = 1; ELSE #101 = 2;

b) When an instruction to be executed is an NC statement or multiple instructions to be executed, the NC statement or multiple instructions must be specified between the THEN/ELSE line and ENDIF line as shown in and . IF[#100 EQ 0] THEN ; GO1 X100 Y200 ; ENDIF ;

When instructions with THEN and ELSE must be executed as shown in , the IF statement can be specified by combining the formats in a) and b). 31


B–66102E/10

IF[#100 EQ 0] THEN #101 = 1; ELSE ; #101 = 2 ; GOO X#103 ; ENDIF ;

Up to three levels of nesting of the IF statement are allowed. IF [...] THEN ; IF [...] THEN ; Statement ;

ELSE ; IF [...] THEN ; Statement ; ENDIF ; ENDIF ; Statement ;

ELSE ; Statement ;

ENDIF ;

CAUTION When only a single macro statement is to be executed, the macro statement can be specified immediately after THEN/ELSE. In this case, no ENDIF statement is usually required. However, an ENDIF statement is required when IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; is specified just before ELSE or ENDIF of the previous nesting as shown below: IF [...] THEN ; IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; ELSE ;

ENDIF ; äThe ENDIF line is required because IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; is specified just before ELSE or ENDIF of the previous nesting.

IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; ENDIF ;

32

ENDIF ; äThe ENDIF line is required because IF [...] THEN Macro-st ; is specified just before ELSE or ENDIF of the previous nesting.

6. RS-232-C INTERFACE SETTING

B–66102E/10

6

RS-232-C INTERFACE SETTING

To transfer a ROM-format file to the CNC system or FANUC PMC-Writer/FA-Writer for writing to ROM/verification or transfer a macro program, the RS-232-C interface is controlled using the DOS function call (21H) auxiliary I/O device (AUX) for MS-DOS. By device specification with CONFIG.SYS, enable RS-232-C ports to be controlled with the auxiliary I/O device (AUX). The RS-232-C interface must be set or initialized beforehand according to the conditions described below. If a transfer operation is once performed via a RS-232-C interface, and the RS-232-C is used again with the same or another command, the RS-232-C interface must be initialized. Transfer rate : Value set with the connected CNC system Data length : 7 bits Parity : Enable/even parity Stop bit : Value set with the connected CNC system Xon/off control System installation processing creates, for use by the user, a standard batch file for RS-232-C interface initialization under the directory \MCOMP\TOOL.

(1) For Fujitsu FMR Series (\MCOMP\TOOL\RSFMR.BAT) Contents : SETUP RSC R0,4800,BITS-7, PARITY-EVEN.STOP-2,XON (2) For NEC PC98 Series (\MCOMP\TOOL\RSPC98.BAT) Contents : SPEED RS232-0 4800 BITS-7 PARITY-EVEN STOP-2 XON (3) For IBM PC-AT Series (\MCOMP\TOOL\RSPCAT.BAT) Contents : MODE COM1:48,E,7,2

33

7. GP-IB INTERFACE SETTING (FOR Series 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A)

7

B–66102E/10

GP-IB INTERFACE SETTING (FOR Series 0, 15-A, 16-A, 18-A)

The GP-IB interface performs interface processing by using a GP-IB BIOS driver provided by each personal computer supplier. The user is to prepare a GP-IB interface board for a personal computer model to use, and to initialize the board according to the operator’s manual before usage. (1) GP-IB interface board Use the GP-IB interface boards listed below. (a) NEC PC98 Series NEC GP-IB (IEEE-488) interface board (PC-9801-29N) (b) IBM PC-AT Series NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS VAT-GPIB Interface & NI-488.2 MS-DOS/NI-488.2 WindowGs SoftwareW FD3/FD5 NO.776207-1 (2) GP-IB interface board setting (a) Set the GP-IB address to 1E (hexadecimal). When an address other than 1E is to be used for some reason, the same address must be set in the parameter -MAxx of the ROM-format file transmitter command (MROMWTG/MROMVFG). When GP-IB address OF is set: A:\> MROMWTG SAMPL.ROM -K110 -K223 -ID40B0 -MA0F

(b) Select the master mode rather than the slave mode. The master mode must be selected because the GP-IB control function is performed on the personal computer. (c) Others For other settings, refer to the operator’s manual of each GP-IB board. (3) FANUC FA Writer setting (a) Set the GP-IB address to 00 (hexadecimal). The address is factory-set to 00. (b) Set the transfer block size to 2058 bytes. The block size is factory-set to 256 bytes. (4) Switching the interface of the FANUC FA Writer (a) Switching the interface of the FANUC FA Writer to a GPIB interface. To switch the interface, turn on the power to the FANUC FA Writer while pressing the FUNCTION key. The FANUC FA Writer then enters the GPIB interface mode.

34

8. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION FILE

B–66102E/10

8

SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION FILE

When the system is installed, a system common symbol definition file is stored under the directory \MCOMP\TOOL. For macro program creation, the user should make full use of the symbolic names defined in the file for variables commonly used with the system. System common symbol definition file File name: \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF To use this file, use the external file reference function described in Item (7) in Chapter 5. For a usage example, see Appendix D. $INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF

For information about the defined symbols, see Appendix A.

35

9. HOW TO VIEW REFERENCE LIST/COMPILE LIST

9

B–66102E/10

HOW TO VIEW REFERENCE LIST/COMPILE LIST

A source program coded using symbolic macro programs is converted by the macro compiler to a program in custom macro format for compile processing. The macro compiler outputs two types of list files: one for a reference list, and the other for a compile list. Since conversion processing is performed, the comment lines and symbol definition lines in a source program are not listed. For this reason, a reference list and compile list output two types of line numbers to identify a compile error in a source program. (1) Reference list A source program coded using symbolic macro programs, cross reference data of used symbols, error messages from conversion processing, and so forth are output in a reference list. Line number S-Line : Source program line number Line number G-Line : Line number after conversion (2) Compile list A program converted to a program in custom macro format, cross reference data of used variables, compile error messages, and so forth are output in a compile list. Line number G-Line : Line number after conversion Line number P-Line : Line number for each program number In the example below, the compile list has an error on G-Line 0002; the same G-Line 0002 in the reference list and the line 4 in the source program have this error. Example) *Reference list (xxx.REF) ---------- Program -------------------------

S-Line 1 2 3 4 5 6

G-Line

0001 0002 0003 0004

@ABC #100 /: O1000 ; ABD = 0 ; M99 ; %

*Compile list (xxx.LST) ---------- program O1000 ------------------G-Line P-Line 0001 1 O1000; 0002 2 ABD=0; error #140C -----------^ ***** ERROR : 140C Illegal function code. 0003 3 M99; 0004 4 %

36

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

A

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

D SYSTEM. DEF for series 0/16/18/20/21 $NOLIST /: /: ************************************************************** /: * System common symbol define * /: * for series 0/16/18/20/21. (V01.03 1999.07.21) * /: ************************************************************** /: /: /: No.01 Control instruction code. /: ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @CALL M98P /: Sub program call. @RETURN M99 /: Return to main program. @RETURNP M99P /: Return to main program with sequence No. /: @DISPLAY G243 /: Character display. @FORM F /: Format. @DATA D /: Data. @NSUP Z0 /: No Zero suppress. @ZSUP Z1 /: Zero suppress. /: @ELASE G202 /: CRT erase. @ELASEGR G202P1 /: Graphic erase. @ELASECH G202P2 /: Charactor erase. @ELASEAL G202P3 /: Graphic & Character erase. /: @RECTNG G204 /: Rectangle display. /: @GRPNT G206 /: Graphic paint out. /: @COLOR G240 /: Display color select. @BLACK G240P0 /: Black. @RED G240P1 /: Red. @GREEN G240P2 /: Green. @YELLOW G240P3 /: Yellow. @BLUE G240P4 /: Blue. @PERPLE G240P5 /: Perple. @SKYBL G240P6 /: Sky–blue. @WHITE G240P7 /: White. @REDR G240P–1 /: Reverse Red. @GREENR G240P–2 /: Reverse Green. @YELLOWR G240P–3 /: Reverse Yellow. @BLUER G240P–4 /: Reverse Blue. @PERPLER G240P–5 /: Reverse Perple. @SKYBLR G240P–6 /: Reverse Sky–blue. @WHITER G240P–7 /: Reverse White. /: @BON L1 /: Blink ON @BOF L0 /: Blink OFF

39

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF) /: @DRLINEK @DRSTART @DRLINE @DRCW @DRCCW

G244 G242 G01 G02 G03

/: Graphic Line kind select. /: Draw start point. /: Linear line display. /: Circle display(CW). /: Circle display(CCW).

@GRCSR

G249

/: Graphic cursor.

/: /: @PMCDATA G310 @1BYTE L1 @2BYTE L2 @4BYTE L4

/: PMC relay/data read and write. 1 BYTE /: /: 2 BYTE /: 4 BYTE

/: @TRSVR G315 /: P–code variable transfer. @TRSVRNML G315P001/: normal transfer. @TRSVRUPT G315P002/: up transfer. @TRSVRDWT G315P003/: down transfer. @TRSVRARG G315P101/: transfer to arangement. @TRSVRUPA G315P102/: up transfer to arangement. @TRSVRDWA G315P103/: down transfer to arangement. /: @PAMAKE @PADELET @PACNDNS @PAREAD @PAWRITE @PABDELT @PACREAD @PACWRIT

G320 G321 G322 G325 G326 G327 G328 G329

/: CNC Prog. access. (Prog. make) (Prog. delete) /: /: (Prog. condense) /: (Block read) /: (Block write) /: (Block delete) /: (Character block read) /: (Character block write)

@RSOPEN @RSCLOSE @RSRECV @RSSEND @RSVARRD @RSVARWT @RSFUNC

G330 G331 G335 G336 G337 G338 G339

/: RS232C open. /: close. /: receive 1ch. /: Data send. Variable data read. /: /: Variable data write. /: FANUC cassettee control.

@PMAFEED @PMACUT @PMADWLL @PMAREFC @PMAMSCL @PMASNRD @PMASNWT

G340 G341 G344 G345 G346 G348 G349

/: PMC AXIS feed. /: cutting. /: dwell. /: reference position return. /: miscellaneous function. /: signal read. /: signal write.

/:

/:

/: /: /: /:

No.02 Conversation MACRO (TAIWA MACRO) control Variable define. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @CMACRO1 #8500 /: Conversation MACRO – 1 MAIN PROGRAM No. @TAIWAP1 #8500 @CMACRO2 #8550 /: Conversation MACRO – 2 MAIN PROGRAM No. @TAIWAP2 #8550 @CMACRO3 #8551 /: Conversation MACRO – 3 MAIN PROGRAM No. @TAIWAP3 #8551

/:

40

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


@KEYCONT #8502 @NOREAD #8502=0 @NUMREAD #8502=1 @ADRREAD #8502=2 @ASCREAD #8502=3

/: MDI–KEY IN CONTROL. /: No Data read. /: Numeric Data read. /: Address+Numeric Data read. /: ASCII Data read.

@KEYCODE @PAGEDW @PAGEUP @CURDW @CURUP @ALTER @INSRT @DELET @INPUT @START @RESET @CURRT @CURLF @PINPUT

#8501 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 18 19 28

/: MDI–KEY IN CODE. /: ”Page Down” KEY pushed. /: ”Page Up” /: ”Cursor Down” ”Cursor Up” /: /: ”Alter” /: ”Insert” /: ”Delete” /: ”Input” /: ”Start/Output” /: ”Reset” /: ”Cursor Right” /: ”Cursor Left” /: ”Input” add decimal point

@SFTLF @SFT1 @SFT2 @SFT3 @SFT4 @SFT5 @SFTRT

11 12 13 14 15 16 17

/: /: /: /: /: /: /:

”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft

key key key key key key key

left” 1” 2” 3” 4” 5” right”

(9”CRT) (9”CRT) (9”CRT) (9”CRT) (9”CRT) (9”CRT) (9”CRT)

@SFTFLF @SFTF1 @SFTF2 @SFTF3 @SFTF4 @SFTF5 @SFTF6 @SFTF7 @SFTF8 @SFTF9 @SFTF10 @SFTFRT

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:

”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft ”Soft

key key key key key key key key key key key key

left” 1” 2” 3” 4” 5” 6” 7” 8” 9” 10” right”

(14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT) (14”CRT)

/:

/:

/:

@KEYDATA @KEYADRS @KEYARRY

#8503 #8504 #8552

/: MDI–KEY IN DATA. /: MDI–KEY IN ADDRESS. /: MDI–KEY SPECIAL READ DATA VAR. No.

@CURSOR @CURSORX @CURSORY

#8505 #8506 #8507

/: CURSOR DISPLAY CONTROL. /: CURSOR DISPLAY POSITION (X). /: CURSOR DISPLAY POSITION (Y).

@CHRPROG @CRTFUNC

#8509 #8510

/: CHARACTER DEFINE PROGRAM No. /: CRT FUNCTION CONTROL.

@ARRY2BS @ARRY3BS @ARRY1CT @ARRY2CT

#8512 #8513 #8516 #8517

/: /: /: /:

/:

/:

/: Array Array Array Array

CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL

41

A. SYSTEM COMMON SYMBOL DEFINITION APPENDIX (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF)

@ARRYTOP

#8519

/: Array CONTORL (Top variable No.)

@TRNSDAT @TRNS2BS @TRNS3BS @TRNS2TO @TRNS3TO

#8511 #8512 #8513 #8514 #8515

/: /: /: /: /:

Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer

@PAPROGN @PABLOKN @PAVARNO @PAPNTVN @PAERROR

#8520 #8521 #8522 #8523 #8529

/: /: /: /: /:

CNC CNC CNC CNC CNC

@PABGEDT @PAPGCNT @PAFPMEM

#8526 #8527 #8528

/: BG–edit status. /: Program count. /: Free program memory.

@RSERROR

#8539

/: RS232C INTERFACE

@MDIKEYI

#8549

/: MDI Key image

@CUTTIME @CUTLENG

#8553 #8554

/: Cutting Time. /: Cutting length.

@HELPPNM @HELPRST

#8555 #8556

/: User’s HELP screen Prog. Num. /: User’s HELP return status.

@KEYLINX @KEYLINY @KEYINUM @KEYPRPT @KEYCLOR

#8561 #8562 #8563 #8564 #8565

/: /: /: /: /:

@ITLCNTL @ITLSTTS

#8600 #8601

/: Inter Lock control. /: Skip signal movement direction.

@PMGSLCT

#8602

/: PMC AXIS select.

@PCDWKNO

#8610

/: P–code Work No. search.

@TRQLTO1 @TRQLTO2 @TRQLTO3 @TRQLTO4 @TRQLTO5 @TRQLTO6 @TRQLTO7 @TRQLTO8

#8621 #8622 #8623 #8624 #8625 #8626 #8627 #8628

/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:

AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS

@CNVTAD1 @CNVTAD2 @CNVTAD3 @CNVTAD4

#8631 #8632 #8633 #8634

/: /: /: /:

CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL

@MSKCLAX @MSKCLTC

#8690 #8691

/: AXIS Macro call mask. /: T code call mask.

/: CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL

/: PROG. PROG. PROG. PROG. PROG.

ACCESS. ACCESS. ACCESS. ACCESS. ACCESS.

(PROGRAM No.) (BLOCK No.) (DATA VAR. No.) (POINT DATA VAR. No.) (RETURN CODE)

/:

/: (RETURN CODE)

/: /:

/:

/: KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY

in line X potion. in line Y potion. input number. in line prompt. in line color.

/:

/: (G–code control)

/: /: 1 limited torque override. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

/: 1 A/D converter. 2 3 4

/:

42

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


/: @PMVSLCT @PMVFLG1 @PMVCMD1 @PMVCSP1 @PMVLNG1 @PMVSTS1 @PMVFLG2 @PMVCMD2 @PMVCSP2 @PMVLNG2 @PMVSTS2 @PMVFLG3 @PMVCMD3 @PMVCSP3 @PMVLNG3 @PMVSTS3 @PMVFLG4 @PMVCMD4 @PMVCSP4 @PMVLNG4 @PMVSTS4

#8700 #8710 #8711 #8712 #8713 #8715 #8720 #8721 #8722 #8723 #8725 #8730 #8731 #8732 #8733 #8735 #8740 #8741 #8742 #8743 #8745

/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:

@WINDIDX @WINDDAT

#8998 #8999

/: Window Index. /: Window Data.

PMC AXIS select. (VARIABLE control) PMC 1 control flag. command. cutting speed. length. status. PMC 2 control flag. command. cutting speed. length. status. PMC 3 control flag. command. cutting speed. length. status. PMC 4 control flag. command. cutting speed. length. status.

/:

/: /: /: /:

No.03 System Variable. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @EMPTY #0 /: ”EMPTY”. @ENMTY #0 /: ”EMPTY”. @ALARM #3000 /: Alarm display. @TIMER1 #3001 /: Msec Timer. @TIMER2 #3002 /: Hour Timer. @SBKCNT #3003 /: Single blok/Auxilialy function control. @FLDCNT #3004 /: Feed hold/Over ride control. @SETTING #3005 /: Setting data. @DATE #3011 /: System date. @TIME #3012 /: System Time. @PARTCNT #3901 /: Part count. @PARTRQT #3902 /: Part request. @MDLG01 #4001 /: Modal G–code Group 1 @MDLG02 #4002 /: Modal G–code Group 2 @MDLG03 #4003 /: Modal G–code Group 3 @MDLG04 #4004 /: Modal G–code Group 4 @MDLG05 #4005 /: Modal G–code Group 5 @MDLG06 #4006 /: Modal G–code Group 6 @MDLG07 #4007 /: Modal G–code Group 7 @MDLG08 #4008 /: Modal G–code Group 8 @MDLG09 #4009 /: Modal G–code Group 9 @MDLG10 #4010 /: Modal G–code Group 10 @MDLG11 #4011 /: Modal G–code Group 11 @MDLG12 #4012 /: Modal G–code Group 12 @MDLG13 #4013 /: Modal G–code Group 13 @MDLG14 #4014 /: Modal G–code Group 14 @MDLG15 #4015 /: Modal G–code Group 15 @MDLG16 #4016 /: Modal G–code Group 16

43


@MDLG17 @MDLG18 @MDLG19 @MDLG20 @MDLG21 @MDLG22 @CORDF @CORDM @SEQNUM @PRGNUM @CORDS @CORDT

#4017 #4018 #4019 #4020 #4021 #4022 #4109 #4113 #4114 #4115 #4119 #4120

/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:

@ABSIO1 @ABSIO2 @ABSIO3 @ABSIO4 @ABSIO5 @ABSIO6 @ABSIO7 @ABSIO8 @ABSMT1 @ABSMT2 @ABSMT3 @ABSMT4 @ABSMT5 @ABSMT6 @ABSMT7 @ABSMT8 @ABSOT1 @ABSOT2 @ABSOT3 @ABSOT4 @ABSOT5 @ABSOT6 @ABSOT7 @ABSOT8 @ABSKP1 @ABSKP2 @ABSKP3 @ABSKP4 @ABSKP5 @ABSKP6 @ABSKP7 @ABSKP8 @OFSEXW1 @OFSEXW2 @OFSEXW3 @OFSEXW4 @OFSEXW5 @OFSEXW6 @OFSEXW7 @OFSEXW8 @OFS54W1 @OFS54W2 @OFS54W3 @OFS54W4

#5001 #5002 #5003 #5004 #5005 #5006 #5007 #5008 #5021 #5022 #5023 #5024 #5025 #5026 #5027 #5028 #5041 #5042 #5043 #5044 #5045 #5046 #5047 #5048 #5061 #5062 #5063 #5064 #5065 #5066 #5067 #5068 #5201 #5202 #5203 #5204 #5205 #5206 #5207 #5208 #5221 #5222 #5223 #5224

/: Block end position. 1’st /: 2’nd

Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group F cord M cord Sequece number Program number S cord T cord

17 18 19 20 21 22

/:

/: Machine Position.

/: Current absolute position.

/: Skip cutting position.

/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:

AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS

1 External workpiece reference offset. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 G54 workpiece reference offset. 2 3 4

44

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

@OFS54W5 @OFS54W6 @OFS54W7 @OFS54W8 @OFS55W1 @OFS55W2 @OFS55W3 @OFS55W4 @OFS55W5 @OFS55W6 @OFS55W7 @OFS55W8 @OFS56W1 @OFS56W2 @OFS56W3 @OFS56W4 @OFS56W5 @OFS56W6 @OFS56W7 @OFS56W8 @OFS57W1 @OFS57W2 @OFS57W3 @OFS57W4 @OFS57W5 @OFS57W6 @OFS57W7 @OFS57W8 @OFS58W1 @OFS58W2 @OFS58W3 @OFS58W4 @OFS58W5 @OFS58W6 @OFS58W7 @OFS58W8 @OFS59W1 @OFS59W2 @OFS59W3 @OFS59W4 @OFS59W5 @OFS59W6 @OFS59W7 @OFS59W8 /: /: /: /:

#5225 #5226 #5227 #5228 #5241 #5242 #5243 #5244 #5245 #5246 #5247 #5248 #5261 #5262 #5263 #5264 #5265 #5266 #5267 #5268 #5281 #5282 #5283 #5284 #5285 #5286 #5287 #5288 #5301 #5302 #5303 #5304 #5305 #5306 #5307 #5308 #5321 #5322 #5323 #5324 #5325 #5326 #5327 #5328

/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:

AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS

5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


G55 workpiece reference offset.





No.04 OTHER SYMBOL DEFINE. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @ON =1 @OFF =0

/: $LIST

45


B–66102E/10

D SYSTEM. DEF for series 15i0/16/18/20/21 (Possible to use this symbol definition evenby series 15B) $NOLIST /: /: ************************************************************* /: * System common symbol define. * * for series15i (V01.01 1999.07.21) * /: /: ************************************************************* /: /: /: No.01 Control instruction code. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ /: @CALL M98P /: Sub program call. @RETURN M99 /: Return to main program. @RETURNP M99P /: Return to main program with sequence No. /: @ELASE G202 /: CRT erase. Graphic erase. @ELASEGR G202P1 /: @ELASECH G202P2 /: Charactor erase. @ELASEAL G202P3 /: Graphic & Character erase. /: @COLOR G240 /: Display color select. Black. @BLACK G240P0 /: @RED G240P1 /: Red. @GREEN G240P2 /: Green. Yellow. @YELLOW G240P3 /: @BLUE G240P4 /: Blue. @PERPLE G240P5 /: Perple. Sky–blue. @SKYBL G240P6 /: @WHITE G240P7 /: White. @REDR G240P–1 /: Reverse Red. Reverse Green. @GREENR G240P–2 /: @YELLOWR G240P–3 /: Reverse Yellow. Reverse Blue. @BLUER G240P–4 /: @PERPLER G240P–5 /: Reverse Perple. @SKYBLR G240P–6 /: Reverse Sky–blue. Reverse White. @WHITER G240P–7 /: /: @BON L1 /: Blink ON Blink OFF @BOF L0 /: /: @ABSMOD G390 /: Absolute mode @INCMOD G391 /: Incremental mode /: @CURSOR G230 /: Cursor display control. @CLEN L /: cirsor length /: @DISPLAY G243 /: Character display. @FORM F /: Format. @DATA D /: Data. No Zero suppress. @NSUP Z0 /: @ZSUP Z1 /: Zero suppress. /: @KEYPRPT G280 /: Prompt display. /: @RECTNG G204 /: Rectangle display. /: @DRLINEK G244 /: Graphic Line kind select.

46

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

@DRSTART @DRLINE @DRCW @DRCCW

G242 G301 G302 G303

/: /: /: /:


Draw start point. Linear line display. Circle display(CW). Circle display(CCW).

/: @PMCDATA G310 @1BYTE L1 @2BYTE L2 @4BYTE L4

/: PMC relay/data read and write. /: 1 BYTE /: 2 BYTE /: 4 BYTE

/: @TRSVR G315 /: P–code variable transfer. @TRSVRNML G315P001/: normal transfer. @TRSVRUPT G315P002/: up transfer. @TRSVRDWT G315P003/: down transfer. @TRSVRARG G315P101/: transfer to arangement. @TRSVRUPA G315P102/: up transfer to arangement. @TRSVRDWA G315P103/: down transfer to arangement. /: @PAMAKE @PADELET @PAREAD @PAWRITE @PABDELT @PACREAD @PACWRIT

G370 G371 G375 G376 G377 G328 G329

/: CNC Prog. access. (Prog. make) /: (Prog. delete) /: (Block read) /: (Block write) /: (Block delete) (Character block read) /: /: (Character block write)

@RSOPEN @RSCLOSE @RSRECV @RSSEND @RSVARRD @RSVARWT @RSFUNC

G330 G331 G335 G336 G337 G338 G339

/: RS232C open. /: close. /: receive 1ch. /: Data send. /: Variable data read. /: Variable data write. /: FANUC cassettee control.

@PMAFEED @PMACUT @PMADWLL @PMAREFC @PMAMSCL @PMASNRD @PMASNWT

G340 G341 G344 G345 G346 G348 G349

/: PMC AXIS feed. cutting. /: /: dwell. /: reference position return. /: miscellaneous function. /: signal read. /: signal write.

/:

/:

/: /: /: /:

No.02 Conversation MACRO (TAIWA MACRO) control Variable define. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @CMACRO1 #8500 /: Conversation MACRO – 1 MAIN PROGRAM No. @AMACRO1 #8600 /: Auxliary MACRO–1 MAIN PROGRAM No. @TAIWAP1 #8500

/: @KEYCONT #8502 @NOREAD #8502=0 @NUMREAD #8502=1 @ADRREAD #8502=2 @ASCREAD #8502=3

/: MDI–KEY IN CONTROL. /: No Data read. /: Numeric Data read. /: Address+Numeric Data read. /: ASCII Data read.

@KEYCODE @PAGEDW

/: MDI–KEY IN CODE. /: ”Page Down” KEY pushed.

/: #8501 1

47


@PAGEUP @CURUP @CURDW @CURLF @CURRT @INPUT @RESET @SFTRT @SFT1 @SFT2 @SFT3 @SFT4 @SFT5 @SFT6 @SFT7 @SFT8 @SFT9 @SFT10

2 3 4 5 6 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:

”Page Up” ”Cursor Up” ”Cursor Down” ”Cursor Left” ”Cursor Right” ”Input” ”Reset” ”Soft key right” ”Soft key 1” ”Soft key 2” ”Soft key 3” ”Soft key 4” ”Soft key 5” ”Soft key 6” ”Soft key 7” ”Soft key 8” ”Soft key 9” ”Soft key 10”

/: @KEYDATA @KEYADRS @KEYARRY

#8503 #8504 #8552

/: MDI–KEY IN DATA. /: MDI–KEY IN ADDRESS. /: MDI–KEY SPECIAL READ DATA VAR. No.

@CHRPROG @CRTFUNC

#8509 #8530

/: CHARACTER DEFINE PROGRAM No. /: CRT FUNCTION CONTROL.

@ARRY2BS @ARRY3BS @ARRY1CT @ARRY2CT @ARRYTOP

#8512 #8513 #8516 #8517 #8519

/: /: /: /: /:

Array Array Array Array Array

@TRNSDAT @TRNS2BS @TRNS3BS @TRNS2TO @TRNS3TO

#8511 #8512 #8513 #8514 #8515

/: /: /: /: /:

Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer

@PAPROGN @PABLOKN @PAVARNO @PAPNTVN @PAERROR

#8520 #8521 #8522 #8523 #8529

/: /: /: /: /:

CNC CNC CNC CNC CNC

@PABGEDT @PAPGCNT @PAFPMEM

#8526 #8527 #8528

/: BG–edit status. /: Program count. /: Free program memory.

@RSERROR

#8539

/: RS232C INTERFACE

@MDIKEYI0 @MDIKEYI1 @MDIKEYI2 @MDIKEYI3 @MDIKEYI4 @MDIKEYI5 @MDIKEYI6

#8540 #8541 #8542 #8543 #8544 #8545 #8546

/: /: /: /: /: /: /:

/:

/: CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL (Top variable No.)

/: CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL CONTORL

/: PROG. PROG. PROG. PROG. PROG.

ACCESS. ACCESS. ACCESS. ACCESS. ACCESS.

(PROGRAM No.) (BLOCK No.) (DATA VAR. No.) (POINT DATA VAR. No.) (RETURN CODE)

/:

/: (RETURN CODE)

/: MDI MDI MDI MDI MDI MDI MDI

Key Key Key Key Key Key Key

image image image image image image image

48

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


@MDIKEYI7 @MDIKEYI8 @MDIKEYI9

#8547 #8548 #8549

/: MDI Key image /: MDI Key image /: MDI Key image

@CUTTIME @CUTLENG

#8553 #8554

/: Cutting Time. /: Cutting length.

@ITLCNTL @ITLSTTS

#8605 #8606

/: Inter Lock control. /: Skip signal movement direction.

@PMGSLCT

#8602

/: PMC AXIS select.

@PCDWKNO

#8610

/: P–code Work No. search.

@TRQLTID @TRQWT @TRQRD @TRQLTAX @TRQLTVL @TRQLTER

#8990 100 101 #8991 #8992 #8993

/: Limited torque /: write. /: read. /: /: /:

@CNVADID1 @ADGEN @ADSPDL @ADAXS @CNVADID2 @CNVADVAL @CNVADERR

#8997 400 401 402 #8998 #8999 #8996

/: A/D converter /: general. spindle. /: /: axis. /: /: /:

@MSKCLAX @MSKCLTC

#8690 #8691

/: AXIS Macro call mask. /: T code call mask.

/:

/:

/: (G–code control)

/: /: override ID.

axis no. value.(0–255) return code.

/: ID1.

ID2. value. return code.

/:

/: /: /: /:

No.03 System Variable. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @EMPTY #0 /: ”EMPTY”. @ENMTY #0 /: ”EMPTY”. @ALARM #3000 /: Alarm display. @TIMER1 #3001 /: Msec Timer. @TIMER2 #3002 /: Hour Timer. @SBKCNT #3003 /: Single blok/Auxilialy function control. @FLDCNT #3004 /: Feed hold/Over ride control. @MDLG01 #4001 /: Modal G–code Group 1 @MDLG02 #4002 /: Modal G–code Group 2 @MDLG03 #4003 /: Modal G–code Group 3 @MDLG04 #4004 /: Modal G–code Group 4 @MDLG05 #4005 /: Modal G–code Group 5 @MDLG06 #4006 /: Modal G–code Group 6 @MDLG07 #4007 /: Modal G–code Group 7 @MDLG08 #4008 /: Modal G–code Group 8 @MDLG09 #4009 /: Modal G–code Group 9 @MDLG10 #4010 /: Modal G–code Group 10 @MDLG11 #4011 /: Modal G–code Group 11 @MDLG12 #4012 /: Modal G–code Group 12 @MDLG13 #4013 /: Modal G–code Group 13 @MDLG14 #4014 /: Modal G–code Group 14 @MDLG15 #4015 /: Modal G–code Group 15

49


@MDLG16 @MDLG17 @MDLG18 @MDLG19 @MDLG20 @MDLG25 @MDLG26 @CORDF @CORDM @SEQNUM @PRGNUM @CORDS @CORDT

#4016 #4017 #4018 #4019 #4020 #4025 #4026 #4109 #4113 #4114 #4115 #4119 #4120

/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:

@ABSIO1 @ABSIO2 @ABSIO3 @ABSIO4 @ABSIO5 @ABSIO6 @ABSIO7 @ABSIO8 @ABSIO9 @ABSI10 @ABSMT1 @ABSMT2 @ABSMT3 @ABSMT4 @ABSMT5 @ABSMT6 @ABSMT7 @ABSMT8 @ABSMT9 @ABSMT10 @ABSOT1 @ABSOT2 @ABSOT3 @ABSOT4 @ABSOT5 @ABSOT6 @ABSOT7 @ABSOT8 @ABSOT9 @ABSOT10 @ABSKP1 @ABSKP2 @ABSKP3 @ABSKP4 @ABSKP5 @ABSKP6 @ABSKP7 @ABSKP8 @ABSKP9 @ABSKP10 @OFSEXW1 @OFSEXW2 @OFSEXW3

#5001 #5002 #5003 #5004 #5005 #5006 #5007 #5008 #5009 #5010 #5021 #5022 #5023 #5024 #5025 #5026 #5027 #5028 #5029 #5030 #5041 #5042 #5043 #5044 #5045 #5046 #5047 #5048 #5049 #5050 #5061 #5062 #5063 #5064 #5065 #5066 #5067 #5068 #5069 #5070 #5201 #5202 #5203

/: Block end position. 1’st /: 2’nd

Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group Modal G–code Group F cord M cord Sequece number Program number S cord T cord

16 17 18 19 20 25 26

/:

/: Machine Position.

/: Current absolute position.

/: Skip cutting position.

/: AXIS 1 External workpiece reference offset. /: AXIS 2 /: AXIS 3

50

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

@OFSEXW4 @OFSEXW5 @OFSEXW6 @OFSEXW7 @OFSEXW8 @OFSEXW9 @OFSEXW10 @OFS54W1 @OFS54W2 @OFS54W3 @OFS54W4 @OFS54W5 @OFS54W6 @OFS54W7 @OFS54W8 @OFS54W9 @OFS54W10 @OFS55W1 @OFS55W2 @OFS55W3 @OFS55W4 @OFS55W5 @OFS55W6 @OFS55W7 @OFS55W8 @OFS55W9 @OFS55W10 @OFS56W1 @OFS56W2 @OFS56W3 @OFS56W4 @OFS56W5 @OFS56W6 @OFS56W7 @OFS56W8 @OFS56W9 @OFS56W10 @OFS57W1 @OFS57W2 @OFS57W3 @OFS57W4 @OFS57W5 @OFS57W6 @OFS57W7 @OFS57W8 @OFS57W9 @OFS57W10 @OFS58W1 @OFS58W2 @OFS58W3 @OFS58W4 @OFS58W5 @OFS58W6 @OFS58W7 @OFS58W8 @OFS58W9 @OFS58W10

#5204 #5205 #5206 #5207 #5208 #5209 #5210 #5221 #5222 #5223 #5224 #5225 #5226 #5227 #5228 #5229 #5230 #5241 #5242 #5243 #5244 #5245 #5246 #5247 #5248 #5249 #5250 #5261 #5262 #5263 #5264 #5265 #5266 #5267 #5268 #5269 #5270 #5281 #5282 #5283 #5284 #5285 #5286 #5287 #5288 #5289 #5290 #5301 #5302 #5303 #5304 #5305 #5306 #5307 #5308 #5309 #5310

/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:

AXIS 4 AXIS 5 AXIS 6 AXIS 7 AXIS 8 AXIS 9 AXIS 10 AXIS 1 G54 AXIS 2 AXIS 3 AXIS 4 AXIS 5 AXIS 6 AXIS 7 AXIS 8 AXIS 9 AXIS10 AXIS 1 G55 AXIS 2 AXIS 3 AXIS 4 AXIS 5 AXIS 6 AXIS 7 AXIS 8 AXIS 9 AXIS10 AXIS 1 G56 AXIS 2 AXIS 3 AXIS 4 AXIS 5 AXIS 6 AXIS 7 AXIS 8 AXIS 9 AXIS10 AXIS 1 G57 AXIS 2 AXIS 3 AXIS 4 AXIS 5 AXIS 6 AXIS 7 AXIS 8 AXIS 9 AXIS10 AXIS 1 G58 AXIS 2 AXIS 3 AXIS 4 AXIS 5 AXIS 6 AXIS 7 AXIS 8 AXIS 9 AXIS10


workpiece reference offset.





51


@OFS59W1 @OFS59W2 @OFS59W3 @OFS59W4 @OFS59W5 @OFS59W6 @OFS59W7 @OFS59W8 @OFS59W9 @OFS59W10 /: /: /: /:

#5321 #5322 #5323 #5324 #5325 #5326 #5327 #5328 #5329 #5330

/: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /: /:

AXIS 1 G59 workpiece reference offset. AXIS 2 AXIS 3 AXIS 4 AXIS 5 AXIS 6 AXIS 7 AXIS 8 AXIS 9 AXIS10

No.04 OTHER SYMBOL DEFINE. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @ON =1 @OFF =0

/: $LIST

52

B–66102E/10

B

B. COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

COMPILE ERROR CODE TABLE

The table below indicates the error codes that may occur in compile processing. Compile Error Codes (1/3) Meaning

Error code 0000

Normal termination

0201

Too many programs

0202

There is no program.

1001

Block delete number contains decimal point.

1002

Block delete number other than 1 to 9 is coded.

1003

Program number is coded not at start of program.

1004

Sequence number is coded not at start of block.

1005

NC statement has format error.

1006

Code other than EOB is present at end of macro statement.

1007

Equal sign cannot be found with macro statement.

1008

DO nesting depth exceeded 3 levels.

1009

Relation operator cannot be found in conditional expression.

100a

IF is not followed by GOTO.

100b

Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for IF[].

100c

GOTO n is followed by code other than EOB.

100d

DO m is followed by code other than EOB.

100e

END m is followed by code other than EOB.

100f

Identification number of END does not match DO.

1010

END to match DO cannot be found.

1011

WHILE is not followed by DO.

1012

Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for WHILE[].

1013

Block not identifiable as NC statement or macro statement is present.

1014

DO to match END cannot be found.

1015

Program number of directory does not match program number in program.

1016

Program number is missing at start of program.

1017

Error in the IF [...] THEN part

1018

Error in the SETVN statement

1019

Error in DEFADD

101a

Error in the POPEN command

101b

Error in the PCLOS command

101c

Error in the BPRNT command

101d

Error in the DPRNT command

53


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Compile Error Codes (2/3) Error code

Meaning

101e

Error in the PGN command

101f

Error in the FDEL command

1020

Error in the FOPEN command

1021

Error in the FCLOS command

1022

Error in the FREAD command

1023

Error in the FWRITE command

1024

Error in the FPSET command

1025

Too many IF [...] THEN parts

1027

”ccall” not followed by EOB code

1028

The multiplicity of IF [...] THEN parts exceeds 3.

1029

AND and OR conditions in the IF [...] part

1030

”ENDIF” not found for the IF [...] THEN part

1031

More than four ANDs or ORs

1033

The number of ”ELSEs” does not match that of IF [...] THEN parts.

1034

The number of ”ENDIFs” does not match that of IF [...] THEN parts.

1035

The number of ”THENs” does not match that of IF [...] THEN parts.

1201

Nesting depth of parentheses exceeded 5 levels.

1202

Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for #[].

1203

Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for [].

1204

Second opening bracket ([) cannot be found for ATAN[]/[].

1205

Slash (/) cannot be found for ATAN[]/[].

1206

First closing bracket (]) cannot be found for ATAN[]/[].

1207

Closing bracket (]) cannot be found for function [].

1208

Format of contains error.

1209

Format of on left side of assignment statement contains error.

120a

Format of in [], -[], or GOTO[] contains error.

120b

Error in the array

1401

Numeric value longer than 8 digits is present.

1402

Decimal point is followed by code other than number.

1403

Macro variable number is longer than 6 digits.

1404

# is not immediately followed by number or opening bracket ([).

1405

Program number is longer than 4 digits.

1406

Sequence number is longer than 4 digits.

1407

Opening bracket ([) cannot be found for function [].

1408

Opening bracket ([) cannot be found for IF[] or WHILE[].

1409

Number m in DO m or END m is longer than 1 digit.

54


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Compile Error Codes (3/3) Error code

Meaning

140a

Number m in DO m or END m is not number from 1 to 3.

140b

DO or END is followed by code other than number.

140c

Alphabetic character string not identifiable as control command or function are present.

140d

Alphabetic character string longer than 5 characters is present.

140e

EOR is missing at end of program.

140f

Code not usable in program is present.

1410

Character string is longer than 255 characters.

1411

Internal code is longer than 4 characters.

1412

Internal code is not represented in hexadecimal.

1413

Internal code that cannot be represented is specified.

1414

Character string command starting with (* does not end with *).

1415

Pair of parentheses contains unallowable character.

1416

Unusable character found between ”,” and ”;”

1417

Unusable character found between ”@” and ”@”

1418

Error in the ”@” and ”@” specification

1419

Hexadecimal code exceeding two digits

1420

Error in the characters or length of a hexadecimal character string

1421

’0’ or ’N’ not followed by a digit

1601

Temporary variable area used for executor is insufficient. NC statement of 1 block includes too many addresses containing .

1602

GOTO destination is to great. Set jump destination for 4-byte output with parameter, or reduce program.

1603

NC statement of 1 block contains more than 50 addresses.

1604

Macro variable number is longer than 6 digits.

1605

Macro variable number is negative.

1606

Macro variable number contains decimal point.

1607

Number after GOTO is longer than 4 digits.

1608

Number after GOTO contains decimal point.

1681

One program contains more than 200 GOTO statements specifying sequence numbers directly.

1682

Sequence number for GOTO destination cannot be found.

1683

One program contains more than 100 WHILE statements.

1684

Multiple sequence numbers are present for GOTO destination.

1801

ROM cassette overflowed.

1900

”%” not found or not correct

2000

Press the RESET button.

2001

Unable to read an NC program

8000

Error in a program number

8001

Unable to convert ASCII codes

9999

missmatch err_code !!

55

C. ROM WRITE/VERIFICATION PARAMETER TABLE

C

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

ROM WRITE/VERIFICATION PARAMETER TABLE

Cassette type

–K1xx

–K2xx

–IDxxxx

–VCxx

–VPxx

–Pxx

Series 0

64Kbyte

–K110

–K223

–ID40B0

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 0

128Kbyte

–K110

–K226

–ID50B0

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 0

256Kbyte

–K110

–K223

–ID40B1

–VCC0

–VP64

–P01

Series 0

512Kbyte

–K110

–K223

–ID50B2

–VCC0

–VP64

–P01

Series 0

1M byte

–K110

–K223

–ID40B2

–VCC0

–VP64

–P01

Series 15

256Kbyte

–K110

–K223

–ID60BD

–VCC0

–VP64

–P01

Series 15

512Kbyte

–K110

–K223

–ID80BD

–VCC0

–VP64

–P01

Series 16A

256Kbyte

–K111

–K230

–IDFFF4

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 16A

512Kbyte

–K111

–K230

–IDFFF3

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 16A

1M byte

–K111

–K230

–IDFFF2

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 16A

2M byte

–K111

–K231

–IDFFF1

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 18A

128Kbyte

–K110

–K230

–IDFFF5

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 18A

256Kbyte

–K110

–K230

–IDFFF4

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 18A

512Kbyte

–K110

–K230

–IDFFF3

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 18A

1M byte

–K110

–K230

–IDFFF2

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Series 18A

2M byte

–K110

–K231

–IDFFF1

Omitted

Omitted

Omitted

Example 1) A Series 0 128K-byte ROM cassette is written to and verified. A:\> MRO WT SAMPL.ROM –K110 –K226 –ID50B0 –VF

Example 2) A Series 15 512K-byte ROM cassette is written to and verified. A:\> MROMWT SAMPL.ROM -K110 -K221 -ID80BD -VCC0-VP64 -P01 -VF

56

D

D. COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

COMPILE/LINK EXAMPLE

The compile/link example described below is created under the directory X:\MCOMP\USR\SAMPL

when the macro compiler utility system is installed. Details of sample: Times required for instruction execution by each of the conversational macros are measured: 1. #100 = #101+#102 ; 2. #100 = #101 AND #102 ; 3. #100 = SIN[#101] ;

The number of test operations is set beforehand in the common variable (#500). Time required for looping by the number of test operations by the WHILE instruction is measured by the timer variable (#3001). Then time required for the same number of loops by the WHILE instruction containing an instruction subject to measurement is measured. Thus the difference between two measurement times is the execution time of the instruction subject to measurement. (1) Programs created File name = MAIN.SRC File name = SUB1.SRC

Main source program file Subprogram source file

File File File File File File

Main program reference list file Main program compile list file Main program object file Subprogram reference list file Subprogram compile list file Subprogram object file

name name name name name name

= = = = = =

MAIN.REF MAIN.LST MAIN.REL SUB1.REF SUB1.LST SUB1.REL

(2) Macro liner File name = SAMPL.LNK File name = SAMPL.MAP File name = SAMPL.ROM

57

Link control file Link map list file ROM-format file


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Main program source file

File name : MAIN.SRC

/: /: SAMPLE Program. /: /: Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program. /: (Vol 01.01 1997.03.14) /: /: /: ( MAIN Program ) /: /: /: Symbol define. /: /: System common symbole FILE Include. /: $INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF /: /: @LOOPCT #500 /: TEST Loop count. @TIMESAV #501 /: No-operatinon Time save. @TSTTIME #502 /: Measured Time save. /: /: @COUNT #100 /: Loop counter work. @WORK #100 /: Work regster. /: /: >LOOP 100 /: GOTO Sequense No. define. >FIN 999 /: /: $EJECT /: /: No. O1000 : Main program. /: O1000 ; NUMREAD ; Numeric data input. CURSOR OFF ³ Delete this line in Series15. ; Cursol OFF DISPLAY X0 Y0 B0 (’EXECUTION TIME TEST’) ; ”MENU” display. X2 Y2 (’1.#101=#102+#103’) ; X2 Y3 (’2.#101=#102 AND #103’); X2 Y4 (’3.#101=SIN[#102]’) ; ; LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (SELECT TEST NO.) ; IF [KEYCODE NE INPUT]GOTO FIN ; ”INPUT” key push ? IF [KEYDATA LT 1]GOTO FIN ; 0 < DATA < 3 chk. IF [KEYDATA GT 3]GOTO FIN ; ; No-ope. Time GET. COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set. TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize. WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ; COUNT = COUNT -1 ; No-operation loop. END1 ; TIMESAV = TIMER1

; ;

58

Sample time save.

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX

TAIWAP1 = KEYDATA*100+1000


; Jump To TEST progra. ; O1x00:x=key in data. ; ; END of conv. MACRO.

FIN RETURNP LOOP /: /: $EJECT /: /: /: No. O1001 : Answer display sub program. /: /: LOOPCT : TEST Loop count. /: TIMESAV : No-operatinon Time. /: TSTTIME : Measured Time. /: O1001 ; DISPLAY X5 Y4 B0 (SANPLE COUNTER) ; Loop count display. X20 Y4 FORM 6 ZSUP DATA LOOPCT ; ; X5 Y6 (TOTAL TIME) ; Total measuer Time X20 Y6 DATA [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] K1 (MSEC); display. ; WORK = [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] / LOOPCT ; 1 operation Time X5 Y8 (ONE OPERATION) ; display. X20 Y8 FORM 5.2 DATA WORK K1 (MSEC) ; ; RETURN ; Return to main. /: /: %

59


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Main program reference list file

(F0/F16)

File name : MAIN.REF

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:27:3 Macro Compiler (Pre) V01.01

Page 1 MAIN.SRC

---------- Compile Parameter -----------------------------------------

---------- Program ---------------------------------------------------

S-Line G-Line 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218

/: /: SAMPLE Program. /: /: Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program. /: (Vol 01.01 /: /: /: ( MAIN Program ) /: /: /: Symbol define. /: /: System common symbole FILE Include. /: $INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF $NOLIST /: /: @LOOPCT #500 /: TEST Loop count. @TIMESAV #501 /: No-operatinon Time save. @TSTTIME #502 /: Measured Time save. /: /: @COUNT #100 /: Loop counter work. @WORK #100 /: Work regster. /: /: >LOOP 100 /: GOTO Sequense No. define. >FIN 999 /: /: $EJECT

60

1997.03.14)

B–66102E/10

(F0/F16)


APPENDIX


Page 2 MAIN.SRC

S-Line G-Line 219 /: 220 /: No. O1000 : Main program. 221 /: 222 0001 O1000 ; 223 0002 NUMREAD ; Numeric data input. 224 0003 CURSOR OFF ; Cursol OFF 225 0004 DISPLAY X0 Y0 B0 (’EXECUTION TIME TEST’) ; ”MENU” display. 226 0005 X2 Y2 (’1.#101=#102+#103’) ; 227 0006 X2 Y3 (’2.#101=#102 AND #103’); 228 0007 X2 Y4 (’3.#101=SIN[#102]’) ; 229 0008 ; 230 0009 LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (SELECT TEST NO.) ; 231 0010 IF [KEYCODE NE INPUT]GOTO FIN ; ”INPUT” key push ? 232 0011 IF [KEYDATA LT 1]GOTO FIN ; 0 < DATA < 3 chk. 233 0012 IF [KEYDATA GT 3]GOTO FIN ; 234 0013 ; No-ope. Time GET. 235 0014 COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set. 236 0015 TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize. 237 0016 WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ; 238 0017 COUNT = COUNT -1 ; No-operation loop. 239 0018 END1 ; 240 0019 TIMESAV = TIMER1 ; Sample time save. 241 0020 ; 242 0021 TAIWAP1 = KEYDATA*100+1000 ; Jump To TEST progra. 243 0022 ; O1x00:x=key in data. 244 0023 ; 245 0024 FIN RETURNP LOOP ; END of conv. MACRO. 246 /: 247 /: 248 $EJECT

61


(F0/F16)

APPENDIX


B–66102E/10

Page 3 MAIN.SRC

S-Line G-Line 249 /: 250 /: 251 /: No. O1001 : Answer display sub program. 252 /: 253 /: LOOPCT : TEST Loop count. TIMESAV : No-operatinon Time. 254 /: 255 /: TSTTIME : Measured Time. 256 /: 257 0025 O1001 ; 258 0026 DISPLAY X5 Y4 B0 (SANPLE COUNTER) ; Loop count display. 259 0027 X20 Y4 FORM 6 ZSUP DATA LOOPCT ; 260 0028 ; 261 0029 X5 Y6 (TOTAL TIME) ; Total measuer Time 262 0030 X20 Y6 DATA [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] K1 (MSEC); 263 0031 ; 264 0032 WORK = [TSTTIME-TIMESAV] / LOOPCT ; 1 operation Time 265 0033 X5 Y8 (ONE OPERATION) ; 266 0034 X20 Y8 FORM 5.2 DATA WORK K1 (MSEC) ; 267 0035 ; 268 0036 RETURN ; Return to main. 269 /: 270 /: 271 0037 %

62

display.

display.


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

(F0/F16)


Page 4 MAIN.SRC

---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------Symbol RETURN RETURNP DISPLAY FORM DATA ZSUP TAIWAP1 NUMREAD KEYCODE INPUT KEYDATA CURSOR TIMER1 OFF LOOPCT TIMESAV TSTTIME COUNT WORK LOOP FIN

Define M99 M99P G243 F D Z1 #8500 #8502=1 #8501 8 #8503 #8505 #3001 =0 #500 #501 #502 #100 #100 100 999

Line No. 268 245 225, 230, 259, 266 259, 262, 259 242 223 231 231 232, 233, 224 236, 240 224 235, 259, 240, 262, 262, 264 235, 237, 264, 266 230, 245 231, 232,

258 266

242

264 264 238, 238

233, 245

63


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Main program compile list file

File name : MAIN.LST

-----------------------------------

(F0/F16)

14-Mar-1997 16:27:43 Macro Compiler V01.01

Page 1 MAIN.SRC

---------- Compile Parameter -------------------------------------------------- program O1000 --------------------------------------------G-Line P-Line 0001 1 O1000; 0002 2 #8502=1; 0003 3 #8505=0; 0004 4 G243X0Y0B0(*0045 0058 0045 0043 0055 0054 0049 004F004E 004D 0045 0020 0054 0045 0053 0054*); 0005 5 X2Y2(*0031 002E 0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030 0031 0030 0033*); 0006 6 X2Y3(*0032 002E 0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030 004E 0044 0020 0023 0031 0030 0033*); 0007 7 X2Y4(*0033 002E 0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0053 0049 004E 0030 0032 005D*); 0008 8 ; 0009 9 N100G243X8Y11B1(SELECT TEST NO.); 0010 10 IF[#8501NE8]GOTO999; 0011 11 IF[#8503LT1]GOTO999; 0012 12 IF[#8503GT3]GOTO999; 0013 13 ; 0014 14 #100=#500; 0015 15 #3001=0; 0016 16 WHILE[#100GT0]DO1; 0017 17 #100=#100-1; 0018 18 END1; 0019 19 #501=#3001; 0020 20 ; 0021 21 #8500=#8503*100+1000; 0022 22 ; 0023 23 ; 0024 24 N999M99P100; ---------------------------------------------------------------------0 errors, 24 blocks, 24 total lines program size = 250 bytes

64

0020 0054 0049 0032 002B 0023 0032 0020 0041 005B 0023 0031

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

(F0/F16)



Page 2 MAIN.SRC

---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100 #500 #501 #3001 #8500 #8501 #8502 #8503 #8505

: : : : : : : : :

14, 16, 17, 17, 14, 19, 15, 19, 21, 10, 2, 11, 12, 21, 3,

(F0/F16)


Page 3 MAIN.SRC

---------- program O1001 --------------------------------------------G-Line 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037

P-Line 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

O1001; G243X5Y4B0(SANPLE COUNTER); X20Y4F6Z1D#500; ; X5Y6(TOTAL TIME); X20Y6D[#502-#501]K1(MSEC); ; #100=[#502-#501]/#500; X5Y8(ONE OPERATION); X20Y8F5.2D#100K1(MSEC); ; M99; %

---------------------------------------------------------------------0 errors, 13 blocks, 13 total lines program size = 145 bytes 14-Mar-1997 16:27:47 (F0/F16) Macro Compiler V01.01

Page 4 MAIN.SRC

---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100 #500 #501 #502

: : : :

8, 3, 6, 6,

10, 8, 8, 8,

65


APPENDIX

Subprogram source file

B–66102E/10

File name : SUB1.SRC

/: /: SAMPLE Program. /: /: Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program. (Vol 01.01 1997.03.14) /: /: /: /: ( SUB Program ) /: /: /: Symbol define. /: /: System common symbole FILE Include. /: $INCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF /: /: @LOOPCT #500 /: TEST Loop count. @TIMESAV #501 /: No-operatinon Time save. @TSTTIME #502 /: Measured Time save. /: /: @COUNT #100 /: Loop counter work. @MAINPR 1000 /: MAIN Program No. @DISPSUB 1001 /: Answer display SUB Program. /: /: >LOOP 100 /: GOTO Sequense No. define. >FIN 999 /: /: $EJECT /: /: /: (#101=#102+#103) Operation Time Test. /: /: No. O1100 : SUB program. /: /: O1100 ; NOREAD ; NO data read. ; DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=#102+#103 TEST’) ; Operation code disp. ; COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set. TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize. WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ; #101 = #102 + #103 ; (Time Measure) COUNT = COUNT -1 ; END1 ; ; TSTTIME = TIMER1 ; Measure Time save. CALL DISPSUB ; Measure Time disp.

66

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN RETURNP LOOP FIN

TAIWAP1 = MAINPR RETURN

/: /: $EJECT /: /: /: /: /: /: /: O1200 NOREAD


; ; ; ”RESET” key wait. ; ; ; ;

(#101=#102 AND #103) Operation Time Test. No. O1200 : SUB program.

; ; NO data read. ; DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=#102 AND #103 TEST’); Operation code disp. ; COUNT = LOOPCT ; Loop counter set. TIMER1 = 0 ; Timer initialize. WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ; #101 = #102 AND #103 ; (Time Measure) COUNT = COUNT -1 ; END1 ; ; TSTTIME = TIMER1 ; Measure Time save. ; CALL DISPSUB ; Measure Time disp. ; LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) ; IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN ; ”RESET” key wait. RETURNP LOOP ; ; FIN TAIWAP1 = MAINPR ; RETURN ; /: /: $EJECT /: /: /: (#101=SIN[#102]) Operation Time Test. /: /: No. O1300 : SUB program. /: /: O1300 ; NOREAD ; NO data read. ; DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=SIN[#102]’) ; Operation code disp.

COUNT = LOOPCT TIMER1 = 0

; ; Loop counter set. ; Timer initialize.

67


WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 #101 = SIN[#102] COUNT = COUNT -1 END1 TSTTIME = TIMER1 CALL

DISPSUB



APPENDIX

; ; (Time Measure) ; ; ; ; Measure Time save. ; ; Measure Time disp. ; ; ; ”RESET” key wait. ; ; ; ;

%

68

B–66102E/10


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Subprogram reference list file

File name :SUB1.REF

--------------------------------------

(F0/F16)


Page 1 SUB1.SRC


---------- Program ---------------------------------------------------

S-Line G-Line 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219

/: /: SAMPLE Program. /: /: Conversation MACRO Execution-Time Test Program. (Vol 01.01 /: /: /: /: ( SUB Program ) /: /: /: Symbol define. /: /: System common symbole FILE Include. /: pINCLUDE \MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF pNOLIST /: /: @LOOPCT #500 /: TEST Loop count. @TIMESAV #501 /: No-operatinon Time save. @TSTTIME #502 /: Measured Time save. /: /: @COUNT #100 /: Loop counter work. @MAINPR 1000 /: MAIN Program No. @DISPSUB 1001 /: Answer display SUB Program. /: /: >LOOP 100 /: GOTO Sequense No. define. >FIN 999 /: /: $EJECT

69

1997.03.14)


(F0/F16)

S-Line 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251

APPENDIX


B–66102E/10

Page 2 SUB1.SRC

G-Line

0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 0020 0021 0022

/: /: /: /: /: /: /: O1100 NOREAD

(#101=#102+#103) Operation Time Test. No. O1100 : SUB program.

DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=#102+#103 TEST’) COUNT = LOOPCT TIMER1 = 0 WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 #101 = #102 + #103 COUNT = COUNT -1 END1 TSTTIME = TIMER1 CALL

DISPSUB



/: /: $EJECT

70

; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;

NO data read. Operation code disp. Loop counter set. Timer initialize. (Time Measure)

Measure Time save. Measure Time disp.

”RESET” key wait.

(F0/F16)

S-Line 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


Page 3 SUB1.SRC

G-Line

0023 0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037 0038 0039 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044

/: /: /: /: /: /: /: O1200 NOREAD

(#101=#102 AND #103) Operation Time Test. No. O1200 : SUB program.

; ; ; DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=#102 AND #103 TEST’); ; COUNT = LOOPCT ; TIMER1 = 0 ; WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 ; #101 = #102 AND #103 ; COUNT = COUNT -1 ; END1 ; ; TSTTIME = TIMER1 ; ; CALL DISPSUB ; ; LOOP DISPLAY X8 Y11 B1 (PUSH RESET KEY) ; IF[KEYCODE EQ RESET]GOTO FIN ; RETURNP LOOP ; ; FIN TAIWAP1 = MAINPR ; RETURN ; /: /: $EJECT

71





(F0/F16)

S-Line 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313

APPENDIX


B–66102E/10

Page 4 SUB1.SRC

G-Line

0045 0046 0047 0048 0049 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065 0066 0067

/: /: /: /: /: /: /: O1300 NOREAD

(#101=SIN[#102]) Operation Time Test. No. O1300 : SUB program.

DISPLAY X2 Y2 B0 (’#101=SIN[#102]’) COUNT = LOOPCT TIMER1 = 0 WHILE[COUNT GT 0]DO1 #101 = SIN[#102] COUNT = COUNT -1 END1 TSTTIME = TIMER1 CALL

DISPSUB



%

72

; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;





APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

(F0/F16)


Page 5 SUB1.SRC

---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------Symbol CALL RETURN RETURNP DISPLAY

Define M98P M99 M99P G243

TAIWAP1 NOREAD KEYCODE RESET TIMER1

#8500 #8502=0 #8501 10 #3001

LOOPCT TSTTIME COUNT

#500 #502 #100

MAINPR DISPSUB LOOP

1000 1001 100

FIN

999

Line No. 241, 273, 248, 280, 245, 277, 230, 243, 307 247, 279, 228, 260, 244, 276, 244, 276, 233, 239, 303 232, 264, 239, 271, 232, 234, 266, 268, 300, 300 247, 279, 241, 273, 243, 245, 309 244, 247, 311

305 312 309 262, 275, 294, 311 292 308 308 265, 271, 297, 296 303 236, 236, 264, 268, 296, 298, 311 305 275, 277, 307, 276, 279, 308,

73


APPENDIX

Subprogram compile list file

B–66102E/10

File name : SUB1.LST

(F0/F16)


Page 1 SUB1.SRC


---------- program O1100 --------------------------------------------G-Line P-Line 0001 1 0002 2 0003 3 0004 4 0030 0033 0020 0054 0005 5 0006 6 0007 7 0008 8 0009 9 0010 10 0011 11 0012 12 0013 13 0014 14 0015 15 0016 16 0017 17 0018 18 0019 19 0020 20 0021 21 0022 22

O1100; #8502=0; ; G243X2Y2B0(*0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030 0032 002B 0023 0031 0045 0053 0054*); ; #100=#500; #3001=0; WHILE[#100GT0]DO1; #101=#102+#103; #100=#100-1; END1; ; #502=#3001; ; M98P1001; ; N100G243X8Y11B1(PUSH RESET KEY); IF[#8501EQ10]GOTO999; M99P100; ; N999#8500=1000; M99;

---------------------------------------------------------------------0 errors, 22 blocks, 22 total lines program size = 163 bytes

74

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100 #101 #102 #103 #500 #502 #3001 #8500 #8501 #8502

: : : : : : : : : :

6, 8, 10, 10, 9, 9, 9, 6, 13, 7, 13, 21, 18, 2,

(F0/F16)


Page 3 SUB1.SRC

---------- program O1200 --------------------------------------------G-Line P-Line 0023 1 0024 2 0025 3 0026 4 0044 0020 0023 0031 0054*); 0027 5 0028 6 0029 7 0030 8 0031 9 0032 10 0033 11 0034 12 0035 13 0036 14 0037 15 0038 16 0039 17 0040 18 0041 19 0042 20 0043 21 0044 22

O1200; #8502=0; ; G243X2Y2B0(*0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0023 0031 0030 0032 0020 0041 004E 0030 0033 0020 0054 0045 0053 ; #100=#500; #3001=0; WHILE[#100GT0]DO1; #101=#102AND#103; #100=#100-1; END1; ; #502=#3001; ; M98P1001; ; N100G243X8Y11B1(PUSH RESET KEY); IF[#8501EQ10]GOTO999; M99P100; ; N999#8500=1000; M99;


75


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100 #101 #102 #103 #500 #502 #3001 #8500 #8501 #8502

: : : : : : : : : :

6, 8, 10, 10, 9, 9, 9, 6, 13, 7, 13, 21, 18, 2,

(F0/F16)


Page 5 SUB1.SRC

---------- program O1300 --------------------------------------------G-Line P-Line 0045 1 0046 2 0047 3 0048 4 0032 005D*); 0049 5 0050 6 0051 7 0052 8 0053 9 0054 10 0055 11 0056 12 0057 13 0058 14 0059 15 0060 16 0061 17 0062 18 0063 19 0064 20 0065 21 0066 22 0067 23

O1300; #8502=0; ; G243X2Y2B0(*0023 0031 0030 0031 003D 0053 0049 004E 005B 0023 0031 0030 ; #100=#500; #3001=0; WHILE[#100GT0]DO1; #101=SIN[#102]; #100=#100-1; END1; ; #502=#3001; ; M98P1001; ; N100G243X8Y11B1(PUSH RESET KEY); IF[#8501EQ10]GOTO999; M99P100; ; N999#8500=1000; M99; %


76

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


---------- Cross Reference ------------------------------------------#100 #101 #102 #500 #502 #3001 #8500 #8501 #8502

: : : : : : : : :

6, 8, 10, 10, 9, 9, 6, 13, 7, 13, 21, 18, 2,

Link control file

File name : SAMPL.LNK

--------------------------------------

/: /: Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ /: /: /: Library file ’FS0-MC’ /: CNC=\MCOMP\MEX\F0MC_07.MEX /: /: compile parameter P9000 - P9009 and P9010 - P9059 /: P9000=10000010 P9001=00000001 P9002=00100000 P9003=00000001 P9037=5 P9038=1000 /: /: Link file’s /: FILE=MAIN FILE=SUB1 /:

77


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Link map list file

File name : SAMPL.MAP

--------------------------------------

Fri Mar-14-1997 16:28:3 Macro Linker V01.01

Page 1

SAMPL.MAP ---------- Library List -----------------------------------------------NO 1 LIBRARY

FILE NAME

LIBRARY NAME

\MCOMP\MEX\F0MC_07.MEX

0-MC MACRO

---------- Compile Parameter ------------------------------------------P9000 P9001 P9002 P9003 P9037 P9038

= = = = = =

10000010 00000001 00100000 00000001 5 1000

---------- Object List ------------------------------------------------FILE NAME

PROG

MAIN.REL

01000 01001 01100 01200 01300

SUB1.REL

SIZE 0000FAH 000091H 0000A3H 0000A7H 00009CH

---------- ROM FILE SIZE ----------------------------------------------SIZE = 10000H ( 64KB )

78

B–66102E/10

E

E. MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18 APPENDIX Super CAP M/Super CAP II M

MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) OPERATION GUIDE FOR THE FANUC Series 16/18 Super CAP M/Super CAP II M

79


E.1 INTRODUCTION

B–66102E/10

Appendix E describes how to operate the tool for supporting the conversational automatic programming function (Super CAP M/Super CAP II M) for milling machines. The user can convert conversational programming menu definition programs together with other macro programs to ROM-format files in a personal computer using the procedure below: The procedures for creating a ROM file and MEM file for Super CAP M or Super CAP II M are described below. (1) Create the following menu definition programs with an editor. D Menu definition program D Conversational data definition program D Data item display program (2) Convert a source file to the table data file in the Super CAP/Super CAP II M table format using the macro converter (MCONV). Example: MCONV JZH_PARA JZH_PARA: Name of source program file for table data (3) Compile the source programs to object files using the macro compiler (MCOMPO). Example: MCOMPO MACHINE MACHINE: Source program file name (4) Use the macro linker (MLINK) to convert the object and table data files to ROM–format files. Example: MLINK BJ64_J BJ64_J: Link control file name (5) Use the MEM file conversion tool (MMCARD) to convert ROM–format files to memory–card–format files. This step is not required for the Series 16/18–MA. Example: MMCARD BJ64_J BJ64_J: ROM–format file name For the syntax of menu definition programs, refer to the ”Super CAP M Programming Manual” (B-62153E). NOTE A FANUC standard macro program is provided only after a confidentiality agreement with a machine tool builder has been signed.

80

B–66102E/10


E.2 MACRO CONVERTER (MCONV) E.2.1 Outline

A source file (extension: .DAT) containing a menu definition program, conversational data definition program, and data item display program is converted to the table data file (extension: .TBL). The conversion result is output to the table conversion list (extension: .LST).

Menu definition program Conversational data definition program

MCONV

Table data (***.TBL)

Data item display program (***.DAT) Table conversion list (***.LST)

E.2.2 Operation

The command format is as follows: A:\>MCONV file-spec parameters

(1) file-spec Specifies the name of a source file to be converted. Specify a file name in one of the two ways below: D Directly specify a file name or file names (Examples) A:\>MCONV ABC DEF GHI

This command converts ABC.DAT, DEF.DAT, and GHI.DAT. D Specify a link control file (Examples) A:\>MCONV @XYZ

This command converts the files specified with TBL= in XYZ.LNK. For details, see Chapter 3. (2) parameters The following parameters can be specified. –NR : Disables table data and files to be output. –L1 : Disables the table conversion list to be output.

E.2.3 Source File

Create a source file consisting of menu definition programs in the format of a text file. Be sure to assign extension .DAT to the source file. The menu definition program, conversational data definition program, and data item display program can be combined into the file as desired in program units. All programs can be created in a single file. If a single file contains a single program, up to 488 files can be created. 81


E.2.4 Table Data File

E.2.5 Table Conversion List File

B–66102E/10

This file, which is output by the converter, is to be edited by the macro linker. The name of the table data file is the same as that of the source file but with extension .TBL.

Conversion results, such as the list of source programs, error locations, error numbers, and converted file/program numbers, are output to this file. The name of the table conversion list file is the same as that of the source file but with extension .LST.

82

B–66102E/10


E.3 CONVERSION OF TABLE DATA WITH THE MACRO LINKER (MLINK) E.3.1 Outline

E.3.2 Link Control File

The table data file output by the macro converter can be converted together with the object file output by the macro compiler to ROM-format files with the macro linker.

The following shows an example of specifying a table data file. In the example, the table data file consists of MENU.TBL for menu definition, DATA.TBL for conversational data, and KOMK.TBL for data item display. /: MACRO COMPILER UTILITY LINK FILE /: SYSTEM FILE CNC=A:\BJ64.PG1 CNC2=A:\BJ64.PG2 CNC3=A:\BJ64.PG3 /: LINK PARAMETER P9000=11000000 P9001=00000001 P9002=11000000 P9003=10000000 P9007=10000000 P9033=12 P9037=5 9038=8000 /: MACRO PROGRAM FILE=ABC,DEF /: TABLE DATA TBL=MENU,DATA,KOMK /:

E.3.3 Link List File

The link list file to be output by the linker contains a table data file name, program numbers, and program size as well as macro program functions. The file name is the same as that of the link control file but the extension is replaced with MAP.

83

F. CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i

F

APPENDIX

CREATING PROGRAMS BY USING SUPER CAP II M/SUPER CAP II T WITH Series 16i/18i

84

B–66102E/10

B–66102E/10

F.1 OVERVIEW

APPENDIX


The conventional Super CAP system (referred to below as CAP), compiles and links all the required user programs (referred to below as programs) into a single MEM file (referred to below as a module), then loads that file into the CNC. Modular Super CAP (modular CAP) allows programs to be loaded into the CNC as a set of modules. The modules include a CAP control module, provided as a library, and other program modules. After the CAP control module has been loaded into the CNC, a user–developed module (user module) can be independently modified or loaded. NOTE The modular function can be used with the modular CAP only.

85


F.2 DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

The requirements for developing a user module and operating it on the CNC are listed below: (1) Personal computer D Main memory: At least 640K bytes D OS: MS–DOS Version 3.1 or above D Hard disk: Minimum of about 20M bytes D 3.5” floppy disk drive (2) Peripherals D Memory card adapter D 4M–byte flash memory card (Intel iMC004–FLSA) (3) FAPT macro compiler (for personal computers) D A08B–9001–J760#EN07 (for FANUC Series 16i) D A08B–9001–J765#EN07 (for FANUC Series 18i) (4) FANUC Super CAP macro library D CAP module D Macro libraries 1 and 2 for developing user modules (5) NC D NC system supporting modular CAP D Macro capacity of at least 3M bytes D F–ROM module with sufficient capacity to transfer the CAP control module and user modules

86

B–66102E/10

F.3 CAP CONTROL MODULE

APPENDIX


The CAP control module is a MEM file that is provided in place of the conventional library file. The CAP control module is loaded into the CNC. The CAP control module contains the following programs: D CAP system control program D FANUC standard macro program (Super CAP II T only)

87


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

F.4

The following user modules can be created:

USER MODULES

D Up to two user modules (user modules 1 and 2). D The maximum total size of user modules 1 and 2 is 768K bytes for Super CAP II T and 1.625M bytes for Super CAP II M. The subsequent sections describe the procedure for creating a user module, restrictions, and notes.

F.4.1

The following macro libraries are provided for creating the user modules:

Macro Libraries for Developing User Modules

D For FANUC Series 16i Super CAP II T: F16ITP1.MEX, F16ITP2.MEX D For FANUC Series 16i Super CAP II M: F16IMP1.MEX, F16IMP1C.MEX, F16IMP2.MEX NOTE 1 F16?P1.MEX and F16?P1C.MEX are used to create user module 1. 2 F16?P2.MEX is used to create user module 2.

F.4.2 Developing a User Module

Follow the conventional procedure for developing a user module. Specify a macro library for developing a user module instead of the conventional macro library. Then, compile and link the modules, and convert the modules into memory card format. The compile parameters to be specified are the same as the conventional parameters. When specifying the size of the memory card module, however, specify the size of the user module in the compile parameter indicated below: Bit No. Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

9000

LD6

M3MB

M2MB

M1MB

M512

M256

M128

#0

Do not specify those bits indicated by shading. Always specify LD6 to 1. Size

M512

M256

M128

512KB

1

0

0

256KB

0

1

0

128KB

0

0

1

The size of user module 1 of Super CAP II M is always 1.375M bytes. Do not specify the M512 bit for user module 2 of Super CAP II M. Specify the series and edition of the user module by adding the following two lines to the link file. SERN = series VERN = edition The series and edition can be specified with a combination of up to four characters each from numerals (0 to 9 and upper–case A to Z). The series and edition specified in the link file are displayed on the conversational system configuration screen (Super CAP only). 88

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


NOTE Specify the user module series/edition display.

When a single user program is divided into two modules, specify the same compile parameters (except parameter 9000) in the link files for user modules 1 and 2.

F.4.3 Transferring the User Module to F–ROM

User modules 1 and 2 must be loaded into F–ROM separately from the CAP control module. The CAP control module and user modules 1 and 2 have the following file names on the F–ROM. D CAP control module PDff_CAP Depends on the SYSTEM compile parameter. T when SYSTEM is TPATH1 or TPATH2. M when SYSTEM is MPATH1 or MPATH2. Depends on the SYSTEM compile parameter. 1 when SYSTEM is TPATH1 or MPATH1 2 when SYSTEM is TPATH2 or MPATH2

D User module 1 P1ff Size specified in compile parameter 9000. However, _CAP is indicated for Super CAP II M.

D User module 2 P2ff

F.4.4 Executing the User Program

When a FANUC standard program and a user program have identical program numbers, the user program takes priority. A FANUC standard program can, therefore, be changed by creating a new program in the user module and assigning it the number of the FANUC standard program to be changed (Super CAP II T only). When user modules 1 and 2 have identical program numbers, that specified in user module 2 takes priority.

F.4.5 Restrictions and Notes on Developing the User Module

(1) User modules 1 and 2 should not have identical user program numbers. If the modules have identical program numbers, the program specified in user module 2 takes priority. (2) Identical compile parameters must be specified in user modules 1 and 2 (except for compile parameter 9000). (3) The total size of user modules 1 and 2 must not exceed the following: D Super CAP II T: 768K bytes D Super CAP II M: 1.625M bytes 89


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

F.5 RESTRICTIONS IMPOSED ON THE SYSTEM

(1) The P–CODE loading function cannot be used with modular CAP. (2) No program can be executed with the user modules only. The CAP control module is necessary.

90

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


F.6 CREATING SAMPLE USER MODULES FOR SUPER CAP II T

D Example Create a 256K–byte user module 1 and link it with the user programs of CAPS and auxiliary processes. Create a 512K–byte user module 2 and link it with a user–developed machining macro program.

F.6.1 Creating Programs

(1) Edit the string file (CAPS.SRC) to change the title of the Super CAP T basic menu screen and the series and edition of the standard macro displayed on the system configuration screen. Character string of the series and edition of D Before editing the user program displayed on the conversa-

Several lines omitted tional system configuration screen /* 123456789012 ; N9998 (’BB0H_ZZ’) ; /* 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 N9999 (’FANUC SUPER CAPIIT!’) Several lines Character string displayed as the title of the Super omitted CAP T basic menu screen

D After editing Several lines omitted N9998 (’ABCDEFG’) ; /* 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 N9999 (’DEBUG SYSTEM FOR SUPER CAP T!’) Several lines omitted

(2) Create user programs for auxiliary processes. D O1004.SRC D O1005.SRC D O1006.SRC (3) Create a machining macro program. D USR_PRG.SRC

91


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

F.6.2

Create the link files to be used to create user modules 1 and 2.

Creating Link Files

D Link file for user module 1 (F16ITP1.LNK) /* /* Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file. /* ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– /* /* executer file ’FS16TI for VGA’ /* Macro library for user module 1 CNC =F16ITP1.MEX SERN =USR1 Add these lines to the link file to display the VERN =0001 series and edition of user module 1. SYSTEM=TPATH1 /* /* compile parameter P9000 – P9009 and P9010 – P9059 /* P9000=10000100 Specify a size of 256K bytes. P9001=10000001 P9002=11000000 P9003=10001001 P9007=01000000 P9009=00000100 Common part shared by user programs 1 and 2 P9013=200 P9021=208 P9022=209 P9023=320 P9024=321 P9030=27 P9031=28 P9033=97 P9037=7 P9044=2044 P9038=4999 /* /* Link file’s /* String file: The string file is also included in the FILE=CAPS Super CAP control module. A program speciFILE=O1004 fied in a user module takes priority. FILE=O1005 FIEL=O1006

92

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


D Link file for user module 2 (F16TCP2.LNK) /* /* Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file. /* ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– /* /* executer file ’FS16TI for VGA’ /* Macro library for user module 2 CNC =F16ITP2.MEX SERN =USR2 Add these lines to the link file to display the seVERN =0001 ries and edition of user module 2. SYSTEM=TPATH1 /* /* compile parameter P9000 – P9009 and P9010 – P9059 /* Specify a size of 512K bytes. P9000=10001000 P9001=10000001 P9002=11000000 P9003=10001001 P9007=01000000 P9009=00000100 P9013=200 P9021=208 P9022=209 P9023=320 P9024=321 P9030=27 P9031=28 P9033=97 P9037=7 P9044=2044 P9038=4999 /* /* Link file’s /* FILE=USR_PRG

Common part shared by user programs 1 and 2

After creating two files as described above, execute MLINK/MMCARD to create MEM files. The following MEM files are created: D F16ITP1.MEM: 256K bytes D F16ITP2.MEM: 512K bytes

93


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

F.7 CREATING SAMPLE USER MODULES FOR SUPER CAP II M

D Example Create a 1.375M–byte user module 1 and link it with a conversational macro program and C program. Create a 256K–byte user module 2 and link it with a user–developed auxiliary macro program.

F.7.1 Creating Programs

(1) While referring to a FANUC standard macro program, create the following conversational macro programs and conversational macro definition tables: D TL_AUTO.SRC D FS_AUTO.SRC D ZH_DATA.SRC D ZH_MENU.SRC D JPN_MENU.TBL D ZH_PARA.TBL (2) Create a required C program. D CPROG.C (3) Create an auxiliary macro program. D AUX_PRG.SRC NOTE A FANUC standard macro program is provided only after a confidentiality agreement with a machine tool builder has been signed.

94

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


F.7.2

Create the link files to be used to create user modules 1 and 2.

Creating Link Files

D Link file for user module 1 (F16IMP1.LNK) /* /* Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file. /* ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Macro library for user module 1. /* If user module 1 is not linked /* executer file ’FS16MI for VGA’ with a C program, use /* F16IMP1.MEX. CNC =F16IMP1C.MEX SERN =USR1 Add these lines to the link file to display the series and VERN =0001 edition of user module 1. SYSTEM=MPATH1 /* /* compile parameter P9000 – P9009 and P9010 – P9059 /v P9000=10000000 The size is always 1.375M bytes and need not P9001=00000001 be specified. P9002=11000000 P9003=10000000 P9007=10000000 P9009=00000010 P9033=12 /* /* Link file’s /* FILE=TL_AUTO FILE=FS_AUTO Conversational macro program FILE=ZH_DATA FILE=ZH_MENU /* /* Table Data /* TBL=JPN_MENU Conversational macro definition table TBL=ZH_PARA /* /* C Program /* C program (when linked) HFILE=CPROG

95


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

D Link file for user module 2 (F16MCP2.LNK) /* /* Conversation MACRO Sample program LINK control file. /* –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– /* /* executer file ’FS16MI for VGA’ /* Macro library for user module 2 CNC =F16IMP2.MEX SERN =USR2 Add these lines to the link file to display the VERN =0001 series and edition of user module 2. SYSTEM=MPATH1 /* /* compile parameter P9000 – P9009 and P9010 – P9059 /* P9000=10000100 Specify a size of 256K bytes. P9001=00000001 P9002=11000000 Common part shared by user programs P9003=10000000 1 and 2 P9007=10000000 P9009=00000010 P9033=12 /* /* Link file’s /* FILE=AUX_PRG

After creating two files as described above, execute MLINK/MMCARD to create MEM files. The following MEM files are created: D F16IMP1.MEM: 1.375M bytes D F16IMP2.MEM: 256K bytes

96

B–66102E/10

G

APPENDIX

G. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B, 0i–A)

BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16-B/C, 18-B/C, 20, 21-B, 0i-A)

G.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 G.2 OPERATION AND CORRESPONDING SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 G.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 G.4 SETTING A MACRO PASSWORD (Series 20) . . . . . 118 G.5 FREE AREA IN FLASH MEMORY (Series 20) . . . 120

97


G.1 OUTLINE

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

The boot system of first loads the CNC system software (flash RAM ! DRAM), then starts execution of the CNC software so that other software can be executed. (Some models run the CNC system software entirely in flash memory or EPROM, without using DRAM.) The CNC boot system supports the following system maintenance functions: (1) Registering a file in flash memory Reads a file to flash memory from an MS-DOS format memory card conforming to JEIDA V4.1. (2) Checking a file (series and edition) in flash memory (3) Deleting a file from flash memory (4) Batch saving of parameters, programs, and other files, powered by battery (SRAM area), to a memory card and batch restoring of data from the memory card (5) Writing a file in flash memory to a memory card (6) Formatting a memory card (7) Deleting a file from a memory card This manual describes the activation of the boot system, as well as the operation and corresponding screen displays for the functions listed above.

G.1.1 Starting the BOOT SYSTEM

BOOT SYSTEM is automatically started when the CNC is powered on. It then loads and starts the CNC system software. The user, therefore, can usually ignore the operation of BOOT SYSTEM. When maintenance is carried out or if flash memory does not contain a required file, however, the boot system must be controlled from an on-screen menu. (1) During system maintenance, for example, when a file in flash memory is to be replaced Operation: Turn the power on by simultaneously pressing the two soft keys at the right end.

Hold down the two keys until the boot system screen appears.

(2) If flash memory does not contain a file required to start the CNC If the file required to start the CNC (NC BASIC) is not found in flash memory, or if that file is damaged, the BOOT SYSTEM menu is automatically displayed when the CNC is powered on.

98

B–66102E/10

G.1.2 System File and User File

APPENDIX


The boot system manages files in flash memory by dividing them into two main groups: system files and user files. These two groups have the following characteristics:

D System files

CNC and servo control software provided by FANUC

D User files

PMC sequence program (ladder), P-CODE macro program, and other user-created files

99


G.2 OPERATION AND CORRESPONDING SCREENS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

When the boot system is started, the MAIN MENU screen appears. The contents of this screen are described below:

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

10.

60M1 - 05

SYSTEM DATA LOADING SYSTEM DATA CHECK SYSTEM DATA DELETE SYSTEM DATA SAVE SRAM DATA BACKUP MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE MEMORY CARD FORMAT

END ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗

SELECT MODE AND HIT [SELECT] KEY

[ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

: Screen title. The series and edition of the boot system are indicated at the right end. : Function used to write data to flash memory : Function used to check the edition of a file in ROM : Function used to delete a file from flash memory : Function used to make a backup of the data stored on a memory card : Function used to make a backup of the data in SRAM

: Function used to delete a file from a memory card : Function used to format a memory card : Function used to terminate the boot system and start the CNC : Brief guidance message or error message

D Operating procedure

Press the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key to select the desired function. After positioning the cursor to the desired function, press the [SELECT] soft key. Before executing a function, the system my request confirmation from the operator by having him/her press the [YES] or [NO] soft key.

D Basic operation Position the cursor. [UP] [DOWN]

Select a function → [SELECT]

→ Return to original state

100

→

Check the selection [YES] [NO]

Execute → the → Select END function


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

G.2.1 System Data Loading Screen Description

This screen is used to read a system or user file from a memory card and write it to flash memory.

Screen configuration

SYSTEM DATA LOADING FILE DIRECTORY B0A1E01.ROM B0A1E02.ROM END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT MODE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][

YES

][

1/1

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

: Screen title. The page number (n) and total number of pages (m) are displayed in n/m format at the right end. : Files on the memory card : Option for returning to the previous menu : Message

Operation (1) Position the cursor to the file to be read from the memory card into flash memory. Then, press the [SELECT] soft key. Up to eight file names can be listed on a single page. If nine or more files are stored on the memory card, the ninth and subsequent files are displayed on other pages. To display the next page, press the [ ] soft key. To display the previous page, press the [ ] soft key. END is displayed on the last page. (2) When a file is selected, the system prompts the operator to confirm loading of that file. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) To load the file, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the [NO] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.

101


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

(4) When the function terminates normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error occurs, see Appendix (B). ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

Others (a) Counter display while a file is being loaded While a file is being loaded, the address of the data currently being accessed is displayed. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD. z ADDRESS 001:000022FF

ÃÃ ÃÃ

The counter is displayed under the message field.

: Number of the 128-KB management unit where the data being accessed is positioned in flash memory

: Relative address within the management unit (Only series 20 is indicated.)

(b) File name in flash memory The boot system uses the first four characters of the file name to identify a file in flash memory. If the file to be read from a memory card and a file already written into flash memory have names beginning with the same four characters, delete the latter from flash memory. Then, start reading the new file into flash memory. The following table lists the names and contents of files. File names may be changed without notice. D Series 16/18 File name

Contents

NC BASIC DG SERVO GRAPHIC NC OPTN

Basic Servo Graphic Optional PMC control software, etc. P-CODE macro file/OMM C-language executor Ladder software Loader ladder software

PMC ∗∗∗∗ PCD ∗∗∗∗ CEX ∗∗∗∗ PMC-∗∗∗∗ PMC@∗∗∗∗

File type System file System file System file System file System file User file User file User file User file

A square (j) and an asterisk (*) represent a numeric character and an alphabetic character respectively. D Series 20 File name

Contents

NC BASIC DG SERVO OPT LANG

Basic Servo Optional P-CODE macro file/OMM Ladder software

PCD ∗∗∗∗ PMC-∗∗∗∗

File type System file System file System file User file User file

An asterisk (*) represent a numeric character or an alphabetic character respectively. 102

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


D Series 21 File name

Contents

NC BASIC DG SERVO GRAPHIC NC OPTN

Basic (:1) Servo (:1) Graphic (:1) Optional (:1) PMC control software, etc. (:1) P-CODE macro file/OMM Ladder software Loader ladder software (:2)

PMC ∗∗∗∗ PCD ∗∗∗∗ PMC-∗∗∗∗ PMC@∗∗∗∗

File type System file System file System file System file System file User file User file User file

A square (j) or an asterisk (*) represent a numeric character or an alphabetic character respectively. (:1) : Only for 21–MB and 21–TB (controller B) (:2) : Only for 21–TB (controller B)

103


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

G.2.2 System Data Check Screen Description

This screen is used to list files in flash memory, together with the number of 128-KB management units constituting each file and the series and edition of the software.


SYSTEM DATA CHECK FILE DIRECTORY 1 NC BASIC(10) 2 DG SERVO( 1) 3 PMC-RA ( 1) 4 PCD 0.5M( 4) 5 OPT LANG( 4) END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

: Screen title. : Names of files in flash memory. The number of management units constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file name. The file names are given in item G.2.1–(1). : Option for returning to the previous menu : Message

104

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


Operation (1) Select the file for which details are required. For example, select ”1 NC BASIC.” (2) The numbers of management units in the selected file are listed, together with the series and edition of the software. After checking the list, press the [SELECT] soft key and return to the file selection screen. ROM FILE CHECK NC BASIC 0 B0A1 801A 000 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

B0A1 B0A1 B0A1 B0A1 B0A1 B0A1 B0A1 B0A1

801A 802A 841A 842A 881A 882A 8C1A 8C2A

000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007

Internal management unit number ROM number and edition Series

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ HIT SELECT KEY.

Others D Parity information for system file and user file The NC BASIC, DG SERVO, OPT LANG, and other system files in flash memory contain parity information in each of their management units. If the file name field or parity field on the check screen contains a non-ASCII character or @, the flash ROM may be damaged/destroyed or a damaged file may have been read. Re-read data from the memory card. The PMC-xxxx, PC-D xxxx, and other user files do not contain parity information in each of their management units. A non-ASCII character or @ may be included in the displayed series/edition information. This does not, however, indicate any abnormality.

105


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

G.2.3 System Data Delete Screen Description

This screen is used to delete a user file from flash memory.


SYSTEM DATA DELETE FILE DIRECTORY 1 NC BASIC(10) 2 DG SERVO( 1) 3 PMC-RB ( 1) 4 PCD 0.5M( 4) 5 OPT LANG( 4) END


YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

: Screen title. : Names of files in flash memory. The number of management units constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file name. : Option for returning to the previous menu : Message

Operation (1) Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the [SELECT] soft key. (2) The system displays the following confirmation message: ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) To delete the file, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press the [NO] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE ROM FILE IN FLASH MEMORY.

(4) When the deletion terminates normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

106

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


Others D System file and user file on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen The SYSTEM DATA DELETE function provides a safeguard against accidental deletion of the system files. User files, however, are not protected. Protected system files can be overwritten by using the SYSTEM DATA LOADING function.

107


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

G.2.4 System Data Save Screen Description

This screen is used to write a user file from flash memory to a memory card. This function supports the writing of user files only. System files cannot be written from flash memory to a memory card.


SYSTEM DATA SAVE FILE DIRECTORY 1 NC BASIC(10) 2 DG SERVO( 1) 3 PMC-RB ( 1) 4 PCD 0.5M( 4) 5 NC1 OPTN( 4) END


YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

: Screen title. : Names of files in flash memory. The number of management units constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file name. : Option for returning to the previous menu : Message

Operation (1) Position the cursor to the name of the file to be saved, then press the [SELECT] soft key. (2) The system displays the following confirmation message: ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) To save the file, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press the [NO] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ WRITING FLASH ROM FILE TO MEMORY CARD. SAVE FILE NAME : PMC RA.000

108

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


(4) When saving terminates normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. The name of the file written to the memory card is displayed. Check the file name. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ FILE SAVE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY. SAVE FILE NAME : PMC RB.000

Others (1) Difference between a system file and user file for SYSTEM DATA SAVE SYSTEM DATA SAVE protects system files so that they cannot be copied easily. User files are not protected. (2) Names of saved files The names of the files written from flash memory to the memory card are as follows: D Series 16/18 Flash memory NC BASIC ! DG SERVO ! NC1 OPTN ! PMC-RB ! PCD 0.5M ! PCD 1.0M ! PCD 1.5M !

Memory card NC_BASIC.XXX DG_SERVO.XXX NC1_OPTN.XXX PMC–RB.XXX PCD_0.5M.XXX PCM_1.0M.XXX PCD_1.5M.XXX

D Series 20 Flash memory NC BASIC ! DG SERVO ! OPT LANG ! PMC-RA ! PCD 0.5M ! PCD 1.0M ! PCD 1.5M !

Memory card NC_BASIC.XXX DG_SERVO.XXX OPT_LANG.XXX PMC–RA.XXX PCD_0.5M.XXX PCM_1.0M.XXX PCD_1.5M.XXX

D Series 21 Flash memory NC BASIC ! DG SERVO ! NC1 OPTN ! PMC-RA ! PCD 128k ! PCD 256k ! PCD 0.5M ! PCD 1.0M !

Memory card NC_BASIC.XXX DG_SERVO.XXX NC1_OPTN.XXX PMC–RA.XXX PCD_128k.XXX PCD_256k.XXX PCD_0.5M.XXX PCM_1.0M.XXX

XXX is equivalent to the extension assigned to MS-DOS file names. One of 32 numbers from 000 to 031 is assigned as XXX. For example, if a PMC-RB file in flash memory is saved to a memory card containing no PMC_RB.* files, the saved file is named PMC_RB.000. If that same file is saved to a memory card that already contains a PMC_RB.000 file, however, it is named PMC_RB.001. In this way, the extension is incremented by one, up to PMC_RB.031. If there are any free extension numbers in the sequence of the extension numbers, they are used in ascending order. If two or more files having identical names but different extension numbers are saved to a single memory card, check the file names displayed after saving. In the case of Serics 20, to write a P-CODE macro file, with a password assigned by MLINK, from flash memory to a memory card, the password must be entered. The macro password is explained in Sec.G.4. 109


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

G.2.5 SRAM Data Backup Screen Description

This screen is used for the batch saving and restoring of parameters, programs, and other data to be retained after the CNC is turned off to/from a memory card.


Select ”4 SRAM DATA BACKUP” from the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen. The following screen is displayed.

SYSTEM DATA BACKUP

1. SRAM BACKUP ( CNC -> MEMORY CARD ) 2. RESTORE SRAM ( MEMORY CARD -> CNC ) END

SRAM SIZE FILE NAME

: :

512K( BASIC ) SRAM_5A.FDB

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

: Screen title. : Menu : Option for returning to the previous menu : Size of SRAM mounted on the CNC : File name : Message

Operation

[Backing up data] (1) Select ”1. SRAM BACKUP.” The following confirmation message is displayed. To back up the data, press the [YES] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ BACKUP SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(2) The FILE NAME: field displays the name of the file that is being written to the memory card. The writing time depends on the amount of free space on the memory card. Generally, to write the SRAM BASIC file (512KB) takes about 2 minutes.

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

SRAM SIZE : 0.5M( BASIC ) FILE NAME : SRAM0_5A.000!MEMORY CARD

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SRAM DATA WRITING TO MEMORY CARD.

110

z Name of file that is being backed up.

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


(3) Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[Restoring data] (1) Select ”2. RESTORE SRAM.” The system displays the following message. Press the [YES] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ RESTORE SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(2) The system displays the following message while the file is being restored. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ RESTORE SRAM DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.

(3) Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

Others (1) Name of a backup file The name of a backup file written to a memory card by the SRAM backup function depends on the size of the SRAM in the CNC. D Series 16/18 The backup file is divided every 512KB. Size of SRAM

File number

0.5MB

1.0MB

1.5MB

2.5MB

1

SRAM0_5A.FDB

SRAM1_0A.FDB

SRAM1_5A.FDB

SRAM2_5A.FDB

SRAM1_0B.FDB

SRAM1_5B.FDB

SRAM2_5B.FDB

2 3

SRAM1_5C.FDB SRAM2_5C.FDB

4

SRAM2_5D.FDB

5

SRAM2_5E.FDB

D Series 20, 21 Size of SRAM

File name on the memory card

128KB

SRAM128K.XXX

256KB

SRAM256K.XXX

256KB

SRAM256K.XXX

512KB

SRAM512K.XXX

CNC Series 20 Series 21

XXX is equivalent to the extension assigned to MS-DOS file names. One of 32 numbers from 000 to 031 is assigned as XXX. The number is assigned as described in the section describing the use of the SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen. If two or more files are normally saved, check the file names displayed after saving. 111


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

G.2.6 Memory Card File Delete Screen Description

This screen is used to delete a file from a memory card.


SYSTEM DATA LOADING FILE DIRECTORY B0A1E01.ROM B0A1E02.ROM

1/1

END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY [ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

: Screen title. The current page number (n) and the total number of pages (m) are displayed in n/m format at the right-hand end. : Files on the memory card : Option for returning to the previous menu : Message

Operation (1) Select the name of the file to be deleted from the memory card by pressing the [SELECT] key. (2) The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the [YES] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) Upon normal deletion of the file, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

Others D When nine or more files are stored to the memory card Display the desired page, by following the procedure in the section describing the use of the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen. 112

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


G.2.7 Memory Card Format Function Description

This function is used to format a memory card. A memory card must be formatted before it can be used for the first time or before it is to be re-used after its data has been lost as a result of its battery failing or similar reasons.

Operation (1) On the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, select ”7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT.” (2) The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the [YES] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

(3) The system displays the following message while formatting a memory card: ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ FORMATTING MEMORY CARD.

(4) Upon the completion of formatting, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

113


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

G.2.8 End of Boot System

Description

This function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the CNC.

Operation

On the MAIN MENU screen, select ”9. END.” The system displays the ”ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO” message. To terminate the boot system and activate the CNC, press the [YES] soft key. If the [NO] key is pressed, the boot system is not terminated. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO. [ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

(1) After the [YES] soft key is pressed D The system checks the NC BASIC system file in flash memory. At this time, the system displays the following message: ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ CHECK CNC BASIC SYSTEM. [ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

D If the NC BASIC system file is normal, the system reads the system file into DRAM (for Series 16-B/C, 18-B/C, or 20) then starts the NC basic system. During reading, the following message blinks: ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING BASIC TO DRAM [ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

D Upon the completion of loading, the following message appears, after which NC BASIC starts. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ CNC DATA LOADED [ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

D If the contents of the NC BASIC system file have been damaged or destroyed, the system returns to the processing selection screen, in the same way as when the [NO] soft key is pressed. (2) If the [NO] soft key is pressed, the system returns to the processing selection screen, shown below: ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT MENU AND HIT [SELECT] KEY. [ SELECT ][

114

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

G.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS

The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabetical order.

Message D

Description and required action

DELETE ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

An attempt to delete a file from flash ROM was unsuccessful.

Action

Retry the deletion. If the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Replace the flash ROM module.

DEVICE ERROR (CNC x)

Cause

An attempt to write data to flash ROM was unsuccessful.

Action

Retry the write operation. If the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Repalce the flash ROM module.

D–RAM OR S–RAM PARITY

F

Cause

Invalid data was found in the RAM area.

Action

If an attempt is made to back RAM that has never been cleared, this message appears. When this happens, the boot system may stop.

FILE SAVE ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

An attempt to write a file to a memory card was unsuccessful.

Action

Check that the memory card is not damaged. (NOTE)

FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE

Cause

There is insufficient free flash ROM to store the selected file. Delete any unnecessary files from flash ROM.

Action

For the Series 20, if this message is displayed and a file cannot be read although the result of calculation indicates that the flash memory has enough space, see Section G.5, ”Free Area of the Flash Memory.”

FLASH ROM MODULE NOT EXIST. Cause HIT SELECT. Action

I

The flash ROM module is not mounted on that CNC system. Put the flash ROM module on the board.

FORMAT ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

The formatting of the memory card failed.

Action

Only a memory card of the SRAM type can be used. Check whether the memory card used is of the flash memory type.

ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE

Cause

The selected file cannot be read into flash memory.

Action

The selected file or the header information for flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed.

Cause

Error in the password specification

Action

Key in the correct password.

Cause

An error occurred while loading data into flash ROM.

Action

Do not touch the memory card while loading data.

INCORRECT PASSWORD

L


LOADING ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.

NOTE Check that the memory card’s battery is not exhusted, that its circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely inserted into its slot.

115


APPENDIX

Message M

MAX EXTENSION OVER. HIT SELECT KEY.

Description and required action Cause

The extension number added to a file name exceeds 031.

Action

Delete any unnecessary backup files from the memory card.

MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. Cause HIT SELECT. Action

R

The memory card’s battery is exhausted. Replace the battery.

MEMORY CARD FULL. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

The memory card is full.

Action

Delete any unnecessary files from the memory card. Alternatively, replace the memory card with another card having sufficient free space.

MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY

Cause

The memory card could not be accessed.

Action

Check that the memory card is normal.

MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

The memory card is not inserted into its slot.

Action

Check that the memory card is pushed fully home.

MEMORY CARD PROTECTED.HIT Cause SELECT KEY.

N

B–66102E/10

Although writing to the memory card was selected, the write inhibit switch is set.

Action

Disable the write inhibit switch.

MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

Access to a memory card failed.

Action

The memory card’s battery may have gone dead, the memory card may have been damaged electrically, or the memory card may not be inserted in the slot securely.

MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

Access to the memory card has failed.

Action

Check whether the memory card is defective.

NMI OCCURRED. PLEASE POWER OFF.

Cause

A hardware or software error occurred.

Action

Determine the procedure which causes the error, and report it to FANUC together with the series and edition of the boot software.

ROM PARITY ERROR: NC BASIC. HIT SELECT.

Cause

The NC BASIC is parity error.

Action

Check whether NC BASIC is in flash ROM, using SYSTEM DATA CHECK.

116

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Message S



SRAM DATA BACKUP ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

An attempt to write a backup file to a memory card failed.

Action


SRAMXXXX * NOT FOUND. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

A backup file of the SRAM with a capacity of XXX cannot be found.

Action

A backup file is required for restoration.

Cause

A parity error was detected during backup operation of SRAM (Caution).

Action

The SRAM areas of all CNCs are cleared before shipment from the factory so that they are free from parity errors. If, however, the CNC receives impact during transportation, or it is left unused for one year or longer, causing the backup battery to run down, a parity error may occur in the SRAM area. If a parity error occurs in the SRAM area, the data stored there is not guaranteed. On the other hand, the CNC may not use the entire SRAM area. It is when the portion where a parity error occurred is called that the error is detected by the hardware. If, therefore, a parity error occurs in a portion not accessed by the CNC, the CNC may operate without any problems. The SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT, however, reads the entire SRAM area, and a parity error may be detected during backup although the CNC operates without any problems. Strictly speaking, if this occurs, the SRAM data of the CNC is not guaranteed and the data cannot be backed up using the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT. Because, however, the CNC may operate without any problem, it is recommended that the necessary data be backed up using a floppy cassette or handy file, all data clear be performed, and then the data backup be loaded into the CNC. Once all clear is performed, the parity error is eliminated, making it possible to use the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT.

SRAM PARITY OCCURRED. PLEASE POWER OFF.

117


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

G.4 SETTING A MACRO PASSWORD (Series 20) G.4.1 Overview

The Series 20 can easily read a file from flash memory and write it to a memory card. Security for the P-CODE file of a user-created macro executor is important. Assigning a password to the P-CODE file at a link (MLINK) affords security against the unauthorized reading of that file. MLINK of personal computer compiler V02.3 or later, which supports a function for specifying a password is used to achieve this.

G.4.2 Password

Specify a single five-digit password, each of the digits being from 1 to 5. A number greater than or equal to 6 or 0 cannot be specified for the password. Only five digits can be specified. If passwords are not used, avoid coding PASS= in the MLINK link control file, described later. Characters that can be specified: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Number of digits: 5 If a password that does not satisfy these requirements is specified, the system displays the following error message: ERROR: Illegal parameter is specified:PASS=XXXXX The system stops MLINK processing.

118


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

G.4.3 Setting a Password

Specify a password in the MLINK link control file (extension .LNK). The five digits immediately subsequent to PASS= constitute the password. In the example below, the password is 15243. (Example) /: /:

MACRO COMPILER UTILITY LINK FILE (SAMPLE)

/: /: CNC=A:\MCOMP\MEX\F20M.MEX /: P9001=0000001 P9010=100 P9037=5 P9038=8000 /: JIKKOU-MACRO FILE=ABC,DEF FILE=XYZ,UVW /: FILE=SSS /: P-CODE FILE PASSWORD PASS=15243

G.4.4 Specifying a Password for the Series 20 Boot System

The Series 20 boot system can read a macro executor P-CODE file having the password from flash memory only when the password is entered. INPUT PASSWORD. ????? The system displays the message and assigns numbers 1 to 5 to the soft keys. When a valid password is entered, the P-CODE file can be written to a memory card.

1

2

119

zSoft keys


G.5 FREE AREA IN FLASH MEMORY (Series 20)

G.5.1 Determining the Cause of the No–space State

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

When the NO SPACE message is displayed, flash memory is in one of the following two states: (1) Flash memory is fully occupied. (2) Flash memory contains files in non-contiguous areas. In flash memory, only continuous free areas are recognized as free areas. Non-contiguous free areas may be ignored as described in (2) above.

Using the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen, check the capacity of the flash memory module installed in the Series 20. Module size

Number of management units

2MB

16

3MB

24

4MB

32

Total the number of management units constituting the files in flash memory and subtract the total from the number of management units corresponding to the capacity of the installed flash memory module.

Number of free management units= Number of management units corresponding – Total number of management to module capacity unitsconstituting all files

The number of management units constituting each file is given in following table. File name

Number of management units

Contents

NC BASIC

Basic

10

OPT LANG

Option

4

DG SERVO

Servo

1

PMC-RA

Lodder

1

PCD 0.5M

P-CODE macro file (0.5M byte)

4

PCD 1.0M


8

PCD 1.5M


12

If a NO SPACE error message is displayed even though calculation indicates that flash memory contains sufficient free management units, then the free area in flash memory is non-contiguous. For example, if the files are read to a 3MB flash memory module (24 management units) in the order in which they are listed below, the module will have four free management units.

24

–

Number of management units in the module

120

20 Total number of management units used

=

4 Number of free management units


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

1 NC BASIC(10) 2 DG SERVO( 1) 3 PMC-RA

( 1)

4 PCD 0.5M( 4) 5 OPT LANG( 4)

The files are written into the 3MB flash memory module as shown below: Before deletion (continuous free area)

Management unit number

After deletion (non-continuous free areas)

Management unit number

File

000

File

000 :

NC BASIC :

:

:

:

:

009

NC BASIC

10

009

NC BASIC

10

010

DG SERVO

1

010

DG SERVO

1

011

PMC-RA

1

011

PMC-RA

1

012

PCD 0.5M

1

012

Free

013

PCD 0.5M

2

013

Free

014

PCD 0.5M

3

014

Free

015

PCD 0.5M

4

015

Free

016

OPT LANG

1

016

OPT LANG

1

017

OPT LANG

2

017

OPT LANG

2

018

OPT LANG

3

018

OPT LANG

3

019

OPT LANG

4

019

OPT LANG

4

020

Free

020

Free

021

Free

020

Free

022

Free

020

Free

023

Free

020

Free

1

NC BASIC

1

Noncontiguous free areas

If P-CODE macro file PCD 0.5M is deleted, eight management units (1MB) become free in flash memory. As the free management units are separated in flash memory, the 1-MB P-CODE macro file PCD 1.0M cannot be read into flash memory. (Use the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen to determine whether the management unit numbers of the files are contiguous.) If non-contiguous free areas are found, use the SYSTEM DATA SAVE function to save the OPT LANG file, sandwiched between two free areas, to a memory card. Then, delete the OPT LANG file from flash memory. Re-read the file from the memory card into flash memory. The file will now be placed next to the PMC-RA file, with a continuous free area of 1MB reserved. NOTE The OPT LANG system file is deleted in this example only for ease of explanation. Actually, the user cannot delete a system file.

121

H. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

H

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)

H.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 H.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 H.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

122

B–66102E/10

H.1 OVERVIEW


APPENDIX

The boot system load the CNC system software (flash RAM→DRAM), then starts it so that software can be executed. The boot system provides the following maintenance functions for the CNC: (1) Registering a file in flash ROM ⋅ Reads a file from a memory card, in FAT format, into flash ROM. (2) Checking a file (series and edition) in flash ROM (3) Deleting a file from flash ROM (4) Batch saving and restoration of files of parameters and programs backed up by battery (SRAM area), to and from a memory card (5) Saving a file in flash ROM to a memory card (6) Formatting of a memory card (7) Deleting a file from a memory card This manual describes the activation of the boot system, as well as the screen displays and operation for the functions listed above. CAUTION This control unit supports the use of a memory card as an input/output device. When a flash card is used, however, data can be written to a FANUC–recommended card only. Data can be read in the same way as with an ordinary SRAM card, provided the data has been saved in FAT format. Note that, when a flash card is used, the card capacity is reduced by 128KB. See the order list for details of the supported memory card types.

H.1.1 Starting the Boot System

In ordinary system activation, the boot system automatically transfers files from flash ROM to DRAM in the background. The user is not aware of this operation. However, the boot system must be operated manually, from menu screen, when maintenance is to be carried out or when the flash ROM does not contain a required file. 1 In system maintenance, for example, to replace a file in ROM Operation : Turn the power on by simultaneously pressing the two soft keys at the right end.

Hold down the two keys until the boot system screen appears.

If soft keys are not provided (for example, when a touch pad is being used), use the MDI numeric keys. Hold down the 6 keys until the boot system screen appears.

±

±

±

±

±

±

±

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

123

and 7


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

2 When the flash memory does not contain a file required to start the CNC Immediately after the CNC is turned on, the boot system starts transferring files from flash ROM to DRAM. If, for some reason, a file required to start the CNC (NC basic) is not in flash ROM or has been destroyed, the boot system is automatically started.

H.1.2 System Files and User Files

The boot system organizes files in flash ROM into two main groups : system files and user files. These two file types have the following characteristics :

D System files

CNC and servo control software provided by FANUC

D User files

PMC sequence program (ladder), P–CODE macro program, and other user–created files

H.1.3

When CAP–II board or LCB (loader control board) is mounted on the CNC, we have to access to SRAM that mounted on additional board. So, the boot system displays BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION screen that to select a access board.

Boot Slot Configuration Screen D Screen configuration

(1) (2)

(3)

BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION NO. 0. 1. 2. 3.

BOARD MAIN PMC–RE CAP–II LCB

F–ROM 4MB 6MB

60M1–02

SRAM 1.0MB 256KB 512KB 512KB

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT SLOT AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

][

DOWN

]

(1) : Screen title. (2) : Flash memory size and SRAM size of each board. (3) : Message D Operation

Press the [ UP ] or [DOWN] soft key to move the cursor, and select board to press the [SELECT] soft key.

124

H.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

When the boot system is first started, the MAIN MENU screen is displayed. This screen is described below :

D MAIN MENU screen (1)

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU

(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

(9)

10.END

(10)

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗

60M1-01


SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

][

DOWN

]

(1) : Screen title. The series and edition of the boot system appear at the right end. (2) : Function for writing data to flash ROM. (3) : Function for checing the edition of a file in ROM. (4) : Function for deleting a file from flash ROM. (5) : Function for making a backup copy of the data stored on the memory card.

(6) : Function for making a backup copy of the data in SRAM. (7) : Function for deleting a file from a memory card. (8) : Function for formatting a memory card. (9) : Function for terminating the boot system and starting the CNC. (10): Condensed guidance or error message D Operating procedure

Press the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key to select the desired function. After positioning the cursor to the desired function, press the [SELECT] soft key. Before executing a function, the system my request confirmation from the operator by having him/her press the [YES] or [NO] soft key.

D Basic operation

Position the cursor. [UP] [DOWN]

Select a function → [SELECT]

→ Return to original state

125

→

Check the selection [YES] [NO]

Execute → the → Select END function


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

H.2.1 System Data Loading Screen D Description

This screen is used to read a system or user file from a memory card into flash ROM.

D Screen configuration

(1)

SYSTEM DATA LOADING

(2)

FILE DIRECTORY B1F1A_B.MEM B1F1A_AI.MEM END

(3)

1/1

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ (4)

SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

][

DOWN

]

(1) : Screen title. The page number (n) and total number of pages (m) are displayed, in n/m format, at the right end. (2) : Files on the memory card (3) : Option for returning to previous menu Message (4) : Message D Operating procedure

1 Position the cursor to the file to be read from the memory card and written to flash ROM. Then, press the [SELECT] soft key. A single page can list up to eight file names. If the memory card contains nine or more files, the remaining files are displayed on another page. To display the next page, press the To display the previous page, press the is displayed on the last page.

soft key. soft key. The END option

The END option is displayed on the last page. 2 After a file has been slected, the system asks whether that file is to be loaded. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

126

B–66102E/10


APPENDIX

3 To start loading, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the [NO] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.

4 When loading terminates normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error occurs, see D.3 ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

D Others 1 Counter display while a file is being loaded While a file is being loaded, the address of the data currently being accessed is displayed. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD. ADDRESS 001: ² The counter appears under the message fild. (1) (1) : Number of 128–KB management unit in flash ROM 2 File name in flash ROM The boot system identifies a file in flash ROM by the first four characters of the ID in the header. If flash ROM has a file of the same type as a file to be read from the memory card, the file in flash ROM is deleted before the file on the memory card is read. The following table lists the IDs in the header and the contents. Note that these IDs are subject to change without prior notice. File name NC BASIC DG SERVO GRAPHIC NCj OPTN PMCj∗∗∗∗ PDj∗jjj∗ P1j∗jjj∗ P2j∗jjj∗ CEX ∗∗∗∗ PMC - ∗∗∗∗ PMC@∗∗∗∗

Contents Basic Servo Graphic Optional PMC control software, etc. 1st executor 2nd executor 3rd executor C–language executor (Except Series 21i) Ladder software Ladder software for the loader

File type System file System file System file System file System file User file User file User file User file User file User file

V : A numeric character, * : An alphabetic character

127


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

3 File name of the executor system software The Series 16i/18i/21i–A has separate executor system software for path 1, path 2, and the loader. All the software is stored in the flash ROM of the first path. Under two–path control with the Series 16–C and the like, a common executor system software file name (PCD1.0M, for example) is used for different paths. The Series 16i/18i/21i, however, use separate file names for different paths. Accordingly, keyword SYSTEM has been added to the link control file of the macro compiler. (See Section 4.2, ”Macro Linker.”) The following format is used for the file name in the flash ROM. (1) Format of the file name in the flash ROM Format PD“path-number” “attribute” “size” Standard : Depends on the compile parameter S–CAP : A fixed value is embedded. M : M series T : T series L : Loader

First executor (Standard/Super CAP)

1 : First path 2 : Second path P1“path-number” “attribute” “size” Depends on the compile parameter Second executor (Super CAP only)

M : M series T : T series 1 : First path 2 : Second path P2“path-number” “attribute” “size” Depends on the compile parameter

Third executor (Super CAP only)

M : M series T : T series 1 : First path 2 : Second path

(2) File name types in the flash ROM F–ROM file name

Description

PD1M“size” PD2M“size”

First path of M series (first executor) Second path of M series (first executor)

PD1T“size” PD2T“size”

First path of T series (first executor) Second path of T series (first executor)

PD1L“size”

First path of loader

P11M“size” P12M“size”

First path of M series (second executor) Second path of M series (second executor)

P21M“size” P22M“size”

First path of M series (third executor) Second path of M series (third executor)

P11T“size” P12T“size”

First path of T series (second executor) Second path of T series (second executor)

P21T“size” P22T“size”

First path of T series (third executor) Second path of T series (third executor)

128

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


H.2.2 System Data Check Screen D Description

This screen is used to list files in flash ROM, together with the corresponding numbers of 128–KB management units in each file and the series and edition of the software.

D Screen configuration (1) (2) (3)

(4)

SYSTEM DATA CHECK [BOARD:MAIN] FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB) 1 NC BASIC ( 10) 2 DG SERVO ( 1) 3 PMC0BSC ( 2) 4 PMC–RB ( 1) 5 PCD 0.5M ( 4) END

1/1

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ (5)


][

DOWN

]

(1) : Screen title (2) : Names of accessing board (3) : Names of files in flash ROM The number of management units constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file name. (4) : Returning to the previous menu (5) : Message

129



APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

1 Select the file whose details are required. For example, select “1 NC BASIC (10).” 2 The numbers of management units in the selected file are listed, together with the series and edition of the software in each management unit. After checking the listed data, select the [SELECT] soft key to return to the file selection screen. ROM FILE CHECK NC BASIC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

B1F1 B1F1 B1F1 B1F1 B1F1 B1F1 B1F1 B1F1

801A 802A 841A 842A 881A 882A 8C1A 8C2A

000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007


0 B1F1 801A 000

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Internal management–unit number ROM number and edition Series

HIT SELECT KEY.

D Others

Parity information for the system file and user file The NC BASIC, DG SERVO, and other system files in flash ROM contain parity information in each management unit. If the file name field or parity field on the check screen contains a non–ASC II character or an “@” , the flash ROM may have been destroyed or a damaged file may have been read. Re–read the data from the memory card. The PMC–RB, PCD 0.5M, and other user files do not contain parity information in each management unit. A non–ASCII character or an “@” may appear in the series/edition information. In this case, it does not indicate that the file has been damaged.

130

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


H.2.3 System Data Delete Screen D Description

This screen is used to delete a user file from flash ROM.


(4)

SYSTEM DATA CHECK [BOARD:MAIN] FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB) 1 NC BASIC ( 10) 2 DG SERVO ( 1) 3 PMC0BSC ( 2) 4 PMC–RB ( 1) 5 PCD 0.5M ( 4) END

(5)


(1) (2) (3)


1/1

][

DOWN

]

(1) : Screen title (2) : Names of accessing board (3) : Names of files in flash ROM The number of management units constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file name. (4) : Returning to the previous menu (5) : Message D Operating procedure

1 Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the [SELECT] soft key. 2 The system displays the following confirmation message : ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 To start the deletion, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO]. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETING ROM FILE IN FLASH MEMORY.

4 When deletion terminates normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

131


D Others

APPENDIX

1

B–66102E/10

System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen The system files are protected from accidental deletion. User files, however, are not protected. Protected system files can be overwritten from the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.

H.2.4 System Data Save Screen D Description

This screen is used to write a user file in flash ROM to a memory card. Only user files can be saved from flash ROM to a memory card. System files cannot be saved.


(4)

(5)

SYSTEM DATA SAVE [BOARD:MAIN] FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB) 1 NC BASIC ( 10) 2 DG SERVO ( 1) 3 PMC0BSC ( 2) 4 PMC–RB ( 1) 5 PCD 0.5M ( 4) END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

][

DOWN

]

(1) : Screen title (2) : Names of accessing board (3) : Names of files in flash memory The number of management units constituting each file appears in parentheses to the right of the file name. (4) : Returning to the previous menu (5) : Message

132



APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

1

Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted. Press the [SELECT] soft key.

2

The system displays the following confirmation message : ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3

To start saving, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO]. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ WRITING FLASH ROM FILE TO MEMORY CARD. SAVE FILE NAME : PMC_RB.000

4

When saving terminates normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. The names of files written to the memory card are listed. Check the file names by, for example, making a note of the list. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ FILE SAVE COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY. SAVE FILE NAME : PMC_RB.000

D Others

1 System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen The SYSTEM DATA SAVE function provides a safeguard against free copying of the system files. User files, however, are not protected. 2 Names of saved files Files saved from flash ROM to a memory card have the following names : Flash ROM

File name in Memory card ³ ³ ³ ³ ³

PMC–RB PD1M 0.5 P12T 1.0 CEX1.0M CEX 2.0M

PMC_RB. XXX PD1M 05.XXX P12T 10.XXX CEX_10M.XXX CEX_20M.XXX

XXX corresponds to the file extension of MS–DOS format files. A number from 000 to 031 is specified for XXX. For example, if the PMC–RB file in flash ROM is saved to a memory card that does not yet contain a file whose name begins with “PMC–RB”, the saved file is named PMC–RB.000. If, however, that file is saved to a memory card that already contains a file named PMC–RB.000, the saved file is named PMC–RB.001. As files are added, the extension is incremented up to a maximum of PMC–RB.031. Any no–longer used numbers in the sequence of the extension numbers are used in as cending order. If two or more files having identical names but different extension numbers are normally saved to the memory card, check the file names displayed subsequently. 133


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

H.2.5 SRAM Data Backup Screen D Description

This screen is used to collectively save and restore parameters, programs, and other data, retained after the CNC power in SRAM is turned off, to and from a memory card.


Select “4 SRAM DATA BACKUP” on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen. The following screen is displayed. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(7)

(1) : (2) : (3) : (4) : (5) : (6) : (7) :

SRAM DATA BACKUP [BOARD:MAIN] 1. SRAM BACKUP (CNC ³ MEMORY CARD) 2. RESTORE SRAM (MEMORY CARD ³ CNC) END SRAM SIZE FILE NAME

: :

256K (BASIC) SRAM256A. FDB

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

Screen title Names of accessing board Menu Returning to the previous menu Size of SRAM mounted on the CNC File name Message

134

][

DOWN

]

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


D Operating procedure [Backing up data]

1 Select “1. SRAM BACKUP.” The following confirmation message is displayed. The backup file name may be displayed according to the SRAM capacity. 2 Press [YES] to start backup. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ BACKUP SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 If a backup file is already on the memory card, you will be prompted to confirm whether to permit overwriting. 4 The name of the file being written to the memory card is displayed in the FILE NAME: field. SRAM SIZE FILE NAME

: 0.5MB (BASIC) : SRAM0_5A.FDB ³ MEMORY CARD


Name of the file being saved

SRAM DATA WRITING TO MEMORY CARD.

5 Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[Restoring the data]

1 Select “2. RESTORE SRAM.” The system displays the following message. Press the [YES] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ RESTORE SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

2 The system displays the following message during restoration. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ RESTORE SRAM DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.

3 Upon terminating normally, the system displays the following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

135


APPENDIX

D Others

B–66102E/10

1 Name of backup file The name of the backup file written to the memory card by the SRAM backup function depends on the size of the SRAM installed in the CNC. When the size of SRAM is 1MB or larger, backup files are created in units of 512 KB.

Number of files SRAM size

1

2

3

4

256KB

SRAM256A.FDB

0.5MB

SRAM0_5A.FDB

1.0MB

SRAM1_0A.FDB

SRAM1_0B.FDB

2.0MB

SRAM2_0A.FDB

SRAM2_0B.FDB

SRAM2_0C.FDB

SRAM2_0D.FDB

3.0MB

SRAM3_0A.FDB

SRAM3_0B.FDB

SRAM3_0C.FDB

SRAM3_0D.FDB

5

6

SRAM3_0E.FDB

SRAM3_0F.FDB

The backup file for SRAM on the PMC–RE, CAPII, or LCB board will have the following extension: Board

MAIN

PMC–RE

CAPII

LCB

Extension

FDB

PMC

CAP

LCB

CAUTION If data such as parameters was restored from a memory card to SRAM in a system using an absolute pulse coder, set bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No. 1815 to 0, and set the reference point again.

136

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


H.2.6 Memory Card File Delete Screen D Description

This screen is used to delete a file from a memory card.


(4)

SRAM DATA LOADING FILE DIRECTORY B1F1A_B.MEM B1F1A_A1.MEM END

1/1

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

][

DOWN

]

(1) : Screen title. Tlhe current page number (n) and the total number of pages (m) are displayed, in n/m format, at the right end. (2) : Files on the memory card (3) : Option for returning to the previous menu (4) : Message D Operating procedure

1 Press the [SELECT] key to select the name of the file to be deleted from the memory card. 2 The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the [YES] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 When a file has been deleted normally, display the following message. Press the [SELECT] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

137


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

H.2.7 Memory Card Format Function D Description

This function is used to format a memory card. Memory cards must be formatted before they can be used for the first time or before they can be re–used after their data has been destroyed or lost because of, for example, battery failure.


1 From the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, select “7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT.” 2 The system displays the following confirmation message. Press the [YES] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

3 The system displays the following message during formatting : ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ FORMATTING MEMORY CARD.

4 When a card has been formatted normally, the system display the D following message. D Press the [SELECT] key. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

138


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

H.2.8 Load Basic System Function D Description

The function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the CNC.


From the MAIN MENU screen, select “9. END.” The system displays the “ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO” message. To terminate the boot system and activate the CNC, press the [YES] soft key. Press the [NO] soft key, and you will be brought back to the main menu. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO. [ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

1 After pressing the [YES] soft key The system checks the NC BASIC system file in the flash ROM. The system displays the following message : ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ CHECK CNC BASIC SYSTEM. [ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

When the NC BASIC system file is found to be normal, the system sends the system file to DRAM and starts the NC basic system. During loading, the system blinks the following message. ∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ LOADING BASIC TO DRAM [ SELECT ][

YES

][

NO

][

UP

][

DOWN

]

If the contents of the NC BASIC SYSTEM file are found to have been damaged or destroyed, the system returns to the processing selection state, in exactly the same way as when the [NO] soft key is pressed. 2 If the [NO] soft key is pressed, the system returns to the processing selection state as shown below : SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

60M1-01


10.END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. [ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP

139

][

DOWN

]


H.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS

APPENDIX

The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabetical order.

Message B

C

D

F

BOOT ROM PARITY. PLEASE POWER OFF.


The contents of flash memory containing boot software was destroyed.

Action

Replace the CPU card.

Cause

The memory card becomes full in the middle of SRAM backup operation.

Action

Replace the card with a memory card containing enough free space.

DELETE ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

An attempt to delete a file from flash ROM was unsuccessful.

Action

Retry the deletion. If the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Replace the flash ROM module.

DEVICE ERROR (CNC x)

Cause

An attempt to write data to flash ROM was unsuccessful.

Action

Retry the write operation. If the second attempt also fails, the flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed. Repalce the flash ROM module.

Cause

An attempt to write a file to a memory card was unsuccessful.

Action

Check that the memory card is not damaged.

Note)

Check that the memory card’s battery is not exhusted, that its circuitry has not been damaged, and that it is securely inserted into its slot.

CHANGE MEMORY CARD. AND HIT YES OR NO.

FILE SAVE ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.

FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE

Cause

There is insufficient free flash ROM to store the selected file.

Action

Delete any unnecessary files from flash ROM.

FLASH ROM MODULE NOT EXIST. Cause HIT SELECT. Action I

L

B–66102E/10

ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE

The flash ROM module is not mounted on that CNC system. Put the flash ROM module on the board.

Cause

The selected file cannot be read into flash memory.

Action

The selected file or the header information for flash ROM may have been damaged or destroyed.

ILLEGAL FROM MODULE. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

The flash ROM module ID is illegal.

Action

Check the drawing No. of the flash ROM module.

ILLEGAL SRAM MODULE. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

The SRAM module ID is illegal.

Action

Check the drawing No. of the SRAM module.

LOADING ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

An error occurred while loading data into flash ROM.

Action

Do not touch the memory card while loading data.

140

Message M

MAX EXTENSION OVER. HIT SELECT KEY.


The extension number added to a file name exceeds 031.

Action

Delete any unnecessary backup files from the memory card.

MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. Cause HIT SELECT. Action

P

The memory card’s battery is exhausted. Replace the battery.

MEMORY CARD FULL. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

The memory card is full.

Action

Delete any unnecessary files from the memory card. Alternatively, replace the memory card with another card having sufficient free space.

MEMORY CARD IS NOT AVAILABLE. HIT SEL.

Cause

The use of this memory card is not supported.

Action

Use only FANUC–recommended memory cards, as described in the order list.

MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY

Cause

The memory card could not be accessed.

Action


MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

The memory card is not inserted into its slot.

Action

Check that the memory card is pushed fully home.

MEMORY CARD PROTECTED.HIT Cause SELECT KEY.

N


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Although writing to the memory card was selected, the write inhibit switch is set.

Action

Disable the write inhibit switch.

Note)


MEMORY CARD TYPE IS NOT Cause AVAILABLE.

Write has been attempted to an incompatible flash memory card.

Action

Use only the flash ROM cards recommended by FANUC. Recommended flash ROM cards are listed in the ordering list.

MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

Access to a memory card failed.

Action

The memory card’s battery may have gone dead, the memory card may have been damaged electrically, or the memory card may not be inserted in the slot securely.

MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

Access to the memory card has failed.

Action

Check whether the memory card is defective.

Note)


NMI OCCURRED. PLEASE POWER OFF.

Cause

A hardware or software error occurred.

Action

Determine the procedure which causes the error, and report it to FANUC together with the series and edition of the boot software.

PLEASE FORMAT FLASH TYPE Cause CARD.HIT SEL.

It is not possible to delete only specific files from a flash ROM card, due to the characteristics of the memory used.

Action

To delete a file it is necessary to delete all files on the card, by using the FORMAT function.

141


APPENDIX

Message R

S

B–66102E/10


ROM PARITY ERROR: NC BASIC. HIT SELECT.

Cause

The NC BASIC is parity error.

Action

Check whether NC BASIC is in flash ROM, using SYSTEM DATA CHECK.

SRAM DATA BACKUP ERROR. HIT SELECT KEY.

Cause

An attempt to write a backup file to a memory card failed.

Action


Note)


Cause

A parity error was detected during backup operation of SRAM (Caution).

Action

The SRAM areas of all CNCs are cleared before shipment from the factory so that they are free from parity errors. If, however, the CNC receives impact during transportation, or it is left unused for one year or longer, causing the backup battery to run down, a parity error may occur in the SRAM area. If a parity error occurs in the SRAM area, the data stored there is not guaranteed. On the other hand, the CNC may not use the entire SRAM area. It is when the portion where a parity error occurred is called that the error is detected by the hardware. If, therefore, a parity error occurs in a portion not accessed by the CNC, the CNC may operate without any problems. The SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT, however, reads the entire SRAM area, and a parity error may be detected during backup although the CNC operates without any problems. Strictly speaking, if this occurs, the SRAM data of the CNC is not guaranteed and the data cannot be backed up using the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT. Because, however, the CNC may operate without any problem, it is recommended that the necessary data be backed up using a floppy cassette or handy file, all data clear be performed, and then the data backup be loaded into the CNC. Once all clear is performed, the parity error is eliminated, making it possible to use the SRAM BACKUP function of BOOT.

SRAM PARITY OCCURRED. PLEASE POWER OFF.

142

B–66102E/10

I

APPENDIX

I. P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A/B)

P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16-B/C, 18-B/C, 21-TA, Series 16i/18i/21i-A/B)

143


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

I.1 OUTLINE

The P-CODE loader function transfers ROM-format files created by a personal computer (PC) macro compiler into RAM of CNC. The function also supports writing to flash ROM (exclude of Series 21–TA). The CNC is connected to the PC via the RS-232C interface. The communication parameters for transferring a ROM-format file (loading) depend on the parameters specified for the CNC. The parameters must be specified prior to loading. When the CNC is turned off then back on by simultaneously pressing the CAN

and

PROG

MDI keys, this function displays the specialized data

transfer screen (loading screen). If Series 16/18–B/C having two–path control is used, the loading screen is displayed after tool post 1 or 2 is selected from the tool post selection screen. Data can be transferred only when the loading screen is displayed. Specify data transfer from the PC. For details of the transfer command, see Section 4.3. While this function is being executed, the CNC power-on sequence is halted. While the specialized data transfer screen or loading screen is displayed, the CNC is disabled. This function requires the executor function and reader/punch control function.

144

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


I.2 PROCESSING BY P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION

(1)

RAM initialization screen

(2)

Loading start screen

(3)

Loading screen

(4)

Loading end screen

(5)

Flash ROM transfer screen (exclude of 21–TA)

(6)

Flash ROM transfer end screen (exclude of 21–TA)

I.2.1 Starting the P-code Loader Function

(1) The communication parameters for loading depend on the parameters specified for the CNC. Specify the channel to be used, the baud rate, and any other necessary parameters beforehand. (2) Turn off the power of the CNC. Connect the CNC to the PC via the RS-232C interface. (3) Simultaneously pressing the

CAN

and

PROG

MDI keys of the CNC

turns the CNC on. Keep these keys held down until the MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTOR P-CODE LOADER title appears on the screen.

145


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

I.2.2 RAM Initialization Screen

When a Series with two-path control is being used, the path selection screen is displayed subsequent to the title screen, as shown below. By pressing the M or S address key, select path 1 or 2. If the 0 key is pressed, P-CODE loader processing is terminated and the Series 16/18–B/C system is activated. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS)

(DATA TRANSFER)

I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE

(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1

LOADING PATH 1 : YES (PUSH M KEY) LOADING PATH 2 : YES (PUSH S KEY) LOADING END : YES (PUSH 0 KEY)

Series with two-path control is being used

When a system other than Series with two-path control is used, the following screen is displayed. The macro executor RAM is initialized. If a Series with two-path control is used, the following screen is displayed after either path is selected. Then, the macro executor RAM is initialized. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER PATH 1/PATH 2 (I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE

= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1

(MAPPING - 1MB)

OMM D-RAM INITIALIZE

146

z This line is displayed only for two– path control. The same applies to the subsequent screens.

B–66102E/10

I.2.3

APPENDIX


After the RAM is initialized, the screen for starting loading is displayed.

Loading Start Screen MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS)

(DATA TRANSFER)


(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1

LOADING READY ? : YES (PUSH 1 KEY)

Once the PC is ready for data transfer, press the 1 key. The system enters the loading wait state. After this screen has been displayed, execute the data transfer command on the PC, then start data transfer. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE

147

= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1

(DATA TRANSFER) ADR000000H:00 (MAPPING - 1MB)


I.2.4 Loading Screen

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

When the CNC receives data, the data reception state is indicated, as shown below. Under the DATA TRANSFER field, the data being transferred together with its address, are displayed. For Series except 21–TA, an asterisk ∗ corresponds to about 16K bytes for DRAM areas of up to 2M bytes or about 32K bytes for DRAM areas of up to 3M bytes. For Series 21-TA, an asterisk ∗ corresponds to about 8K bytes. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE

148

= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1

(DATA TRANSFER) ADRxxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)

∗∗∗∗

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


I.2.5 Loading End Screen

This screen indicates whether loading has terminated normally. (Normal termination) (1) Except Series 21–TA Once data has been loaded normally, the following screen appears. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE

= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1


∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗

LOADING END : TOTAL xxxxxxxxBYTES LOADING TO FLASH ROM ? :YES(1)/NO(CAN) YES (PUSH 1 KEY) / NO (PUSH CAN KEY)

: Writing to flash ROM is started. NO (PUSH CAN KEY) : The processing is terminated. Specify whether to start writing to the flash ROM. To start transferring data from RAM to the flash ROM, press the 1 key. (See Subsec. I.2.6.) If the (CAN) MDI key is pressed, the following screen is displayed. YES (PUSH 1 KEY)

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE

= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1


∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗

PUSH 1 KEY: CNC START WITH EXECUTER

When the 1 key is pressed, the P-CODE loader function is terminated and the CNC is started. If a Series with two-path control is being used, the following message is displayed. To return to the path selection screen, press the 1 key. 149


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER HEAD 1 (I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER) ADRxxxxxxH:xx I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB) ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ I/O UNIT = 0 BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗ STOP BIT = 1 INPUT CODE = 1

PUSH 1 KEY : RETURN TO HEAD SELECTION

(2) For the 21-TA Once data has been loaded normally, the following screen appears. Pressing the 1 key on this screen causes the P-CODE loader processing to be terminated and the CNC to be started. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER HEAD 1 (I/O PARAMETERS) (DATA TRANSFER) ADRxxxxxxH:xx I/O CHANNEL = 0 (MAPPING - 1MB) I/O UNIT = 0 ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ BAUDRATE =11 ∗∗∗∗∗ STOP BIT = 1 INPUT CODE = 1

PUSH 1 KEY : CNC START WITH EXECUTER

If an error occurs during loading, the following error message is displayed. To retry loading, press the 1 key. (The processing is repeated, starting from RAM initialization.) When you press CAN key and numeric ”1” key on the MDI keyboard, the P-CODE loader processing is terminated and the CNC is started. If a Series with two-path control is being used, the path selection screen is displayed again.

150


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

(Abnormal termination) MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE


= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

(ERROR OCCURED) ILLEGAL CHARACTER

LOADING RESTART ?

: YES (PUSH 1 KEY) : NO (PUSH CAN KEY)

: Re-loading into RAM is started. : The processing is terminated. Specify whether to start re-loading into RAM. If the executor or reader/punch control function is not selected, the following message is displayed. YES (PUSH 1 KEY) NO

(PUSH CAN KEY)

MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS)

(DATA TRANSFER)


(MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1

EXECUTER OPTION NOTHING I/O OPTION NOTHING I/O OPTION (CH2) NOTHING PUSH 1 KEY : CNC START

Press the 1 key to terminate the P-CODE loader processing and start the CNC.

151


I.2.6 Flash ROM Transfer Screen (Except Series 21)

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

While data is being transferred from RAM to the flash ROM, the following screen is displayed: MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE

= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1


∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : EXECUTING

While data is being written to flash ROM, the EXECUTING message blinks.

152

B–66102E/10

I.2.7 Flash ROM Transfer End Screen (Except Series 21)

APPENDIX


This screen indicates whether the data transfer to flash ROM terminated normally. (Normal termination) MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE

= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1


∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : COMPLETE PUSH 1 KEY : CNC START WITH EXECUTER

Press the 1 key to terminate P-CODE processing and start the CNC. If a Series with two–path control is being used, the following message is displayed. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE

= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1


∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : COMPLETE PUSH 1 KEY : RETURN TO HEAD SELECTION

Press the 1 key to return to the path selection screen. If an attempt to load data into flash ROM fails, the following error message is displayed. To start re-loading into flash ROM, press the 1 key. Press the CAN key and then 1 key on the MDI keyboard to terminate the P-CODE loader processing and start the CNC. The P-CODE previously loaded into DRAM is effective. If a Series with two-path control is being used, the tool post selection screen is displayed again. 153


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


= 0 = 0 =11 = 1 = 1


∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗

(ERROR OCCURED) UNKNOWN F-ROM MODULE OR NOT MOUNTED

LOADING RESTART ?

: YES(PUSH 1 KEY) : NO (PUSH CAN KEY)

: Re-loading into flash ROM is started. : The processing is terminated. Specify whether to start re-loading into the flash ROM. YES (PUSH 1 KEY) NO

(PUSH CAN KEY)

154

B–66102E/10

I.2.8 Notes

APPENDIX


(1) The Series except 21–TA uses either channel 1 or 2 for input and output during loading. The Series except 21–TA cannot use another channel for loading. The Series 21-TA use channel 1. (2) Either ASCII or ISO data can be transferred. EIA data is not supported. The ASI bit (bit 3 of parameter 101, 111, or 121) specifies whether ASCII or ISO data is being used. (3) The I/O parameters on the loading screen indicate the values of the RS-232-C parameters related to (1) and (2) above. The parameters cannot be specified using the loading screen. (4) Even if the PLD bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) for overwrite loading is set to 1, the operation of the macro compiler determines whether both the P-CODE and executor sections are transferred or if only the P-CODE section is transferred. (5) When no data is written to the FLASH ROM or data is deleted from the FLASH ROM, set the PLD bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) to 0 so that the data including the executor section is loaded.

155


I.3 PARAMETER

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Address 0020

I/O DEVICE SELECTION : I / O C H A N N E L

Setting Entry [Data type] : Byte [Data range] : 0 to 3 Select an I/ O device used. 0 : Select a device connected to channel 1. (I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD) 1 : Select a device connected to channel 1. (I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD) 2 : Select a device connected to channel 2. (Except Series 21–TA) (I/O device connected to JD5B on MAIN CPU BOARD) I/O device usable with P- CODE LOADER is either channel 1 or 2. NOTE The Series 21-TA use channel 1. Bit No. Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

0101

[Data type] SB2 ASI

#3

#2

ASI

#1

#0 SB2

: Bit : Number of stop bits: 0 : 1 bit 1 : 2 bits : Input data code: 0 : ISO 1 : ASCII

NOTE EIA code cannot be used for P-CODE LOADER. Address 0102

Specification no. of I/O device (when I/O channel=0)

[Data type] : Byte Set a specification number of I/O device when I/O Channel=0 according to Table 1. Table 1 Set value

Specification of I/O device

0 1 2 3

RS–232–C FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2) FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1) FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR FANUC FLOOPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H Unused Portable tape reader FANUC PPR FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL G FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL H

4 5 6

Set 0 for P-CODE LOADER. 156


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Address 0103

Baud rate (For I/O CHANNEL=0)

[Data type] : Byte Set a baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=0 according to Table 2. Table 2 Set

Baud rate

Set

1

50

5

2

100

3 4

Baud rate

Set

Baud rate

20

9

2400

6

300

10

4800

110

7

600

11

9600

150

8

1200

12

19200

Set the same baud rate as the personal computer for P-CODE LOADER. Bit No. Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

0111

#3

#2

#1

ASI

#0 SB2

[Data type] : Bit These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=1. Meaning of each bit is the same as parameter No. 0101. Address 0112

Specification number of I/O device (for I/O CHANNEL=1)

[Data type] : Byte Set specification number of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1 according to Table 1. Address 0113

Baud rate (I/O CHANNEL=1 )

[Data type] : Byte Baud rate of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1 according to Table 2. Bit No. Address

#7

0121

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

ASI

#1

#0 SB2

[Data type] : Bit These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=2. The meaning of each bit is the same as parameter No. 101. Address 0122

Specification number of I/O device (I/O CHANNEL=2)

[Data type] : Byte Set the specification number of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2 according to Table 1.

157


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Address 0123


[Data type] : Byte Set baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2 according to Table 2. Bit No. Address

#7

#6

8701

[Data type] PLD

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1 PLD

: Bit : P-CODE Loader of Macro Compiler/Executer 0 : Clears RAM and rewrites all contents. 1 : Do not clear RAM and overwrites it.

158

#0


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

I.4 ALARMS Message EXECUTER OPTION NOTHING OR NO SPACE IN D-RAM

Meaning Possible causes are as follows: 1) No macro executor option has been selected. 2) No macro capacity option has been selected. 3) An area of the capacity specified with the macro capacity option cannot be allocated in D-RAM. 4) The area allocated with the macro capacity option is being used by the C executor.

I/O OPTION NOTHING

Reader/puncher control 1 option is not selected.

I/O OPTION (CH2) NOTHING


ILLEGAL CHANNEL

A channel other than channel 1 and 2 is selected.

ILLEGAL CHARACTER

Transferred data is not correct.

OVERRUN

Overrun error.

FRAMING ERROR

Framing error.

DSR SIGNAL OFF

Communication error.

PARITY ERROR

Data with no parity was transferred.

CHECK SUM ERROR

Check sum error.

MEXE NOT FOUND

No executer part exists. Execute loading including executer part.

FILE SIZE OVER

The size of P-CODE to be loaded exceeds the size of D-RAM.

HEADER NOT FOUND

There is no header that is used for writing data in F-ROM. There may be no ”-s” instruction in transfer command.

UNKNOWN F-ROM MODULE OR NOT MOUNTED

F-ROM module is unknown or not mounted.

ILLEGAL ID INFORMATION

F-ROM file ID is incorrect.

NO SPACE

There is no space in F- ROM module.

ERASE ERROR

Deletion of F-ROM failed. F-ROM may be defective.

PROGRAM ERROR

Writing in F-ROM failed. F-ROM may be defective.

159

J. P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)

J

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

P-CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 20)

The P-CODE loader function transfers ROM-format files created by a personal computer (PC) macro compiler into RAM of CNC. The function also supports writing to flash ROM. The CNC is connected to the PC via the RS-232C interface. The communication parameters for transferring a ROM-format file (loading) depend on the parameters specified for the CNC. The parameters must be specified prior to loading. Display an IPL menu by turning on the power while pressing the two most lefthand soft keys. The P-code loader function can be executed on the IPL menu.

Press and hold down these two soft keys.

160


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

J.1 IPL MENU FS20 IPL MENU 1 2 END

FILE CLEAR P CODE LOADER

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT ITEM AND HIT [SELECT] KEY. [

UP

][

DOWN

][

][

][ SELECT ]

(a) Select a mode by pressing the [UP] and [DOWN] soft keys, then press the [SELECT] soft key. 1.

FILE CLEAR

: Clears files such as offsets and programs 2. P CODE LOADER : Loads ROM-format files (P-CODE files). If no reader/punch control option is provided, the P-code loader menu is not displayed. END : Terminate IPL processing and starts the system

161


J.2 PROCESSING FLOW FOR THE P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION

J.2.1 RAM Initializing Menu

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

The P-CODE loader function performs processing as follows. At each step the appropriate menu is displayed. (a) RAM initializing menu # (b) Loading start menu # (c) Loading menu # (d) Loading end menu # (e) Menu for transferring data into flash ROM memory # (f) Menu for end of transfer of flash ROM memory

When the P-CODE loader function is executed, the function starts initializing the RAM area. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS)

(DATA TRANSFER)


(MAPPING - 1MB) –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––

= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1

OMM RAM MODULE INITIALIZE

[

][

162

][

][

][

]

J.2.2 Loading Start Menu


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Upon completion of RAM area initialization, the loading start menu is displayed. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS)

(DATA TRANSFER)


(MAPPING - 1MB) –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––

= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1

LOADING READY ? : YES/NO

[

][

][

YES

][

NO

][

]

[ YES ] :

Starts loading data into DRAM.

[ NO

Cancels loading data (IPL menu reappears).

] :

Once preparations for data transfer have been completed on the personal computer, press the [YES] soft key. The CNC enters the data reception wait state. To start data transfer, execute the data transfer command (see Section 4.3) from the personal computer.

J.2.3 Loading Menu

When the CNC receives data, the data reception state is indicated, as shown below. Under the DATA TRANSFER field, the data being transferred together with its address, are displayed. An asterisk ∗ corresponds to about 8k bytes. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE

(DATA TRANSFER) ADR xxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB)

= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––

OMM RAM MODULE INITIALIZE

[

][

163

][

][

][

]


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

J.2.4 Loading End Menu

When loading ends, either of the following screens appears to indicate whether loading terminated normally. (For normal termination) MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE


= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––

LOADING END : TOTAL xxxxxxxx BYTES LOADING TO FLASH ROM ? : YES/NO [

][

][

YES

][

NO

][

]

[ YES ] :

Starts writing data into flash ROM memory.

[ NO

Cancels writing data into flash ROM memory (IPL menu reappears).

] :

Specify whether writing data into flash ROM memory is started by selecting the [YES] or [NO] soft key. (For abnormal termination) MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE

(DATA TRANSFER) ADR xxxxxxH:xx (MAPPING - 1MB) ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗–––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––

= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1

(ERROR OCCURED) ILLEGAL CHARACTER LOADING RESTART ? : YES/NO [

][

[ YES ] :

][

YES

][

NO

][

]

Starts reloading data into DRAM.

NOTE Reloading data is started after DRAM is initialized.

[ NO

] :

Terminates loading (IPL menu reappears). 164

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


NOTE The IPL menu reappears after DRAM is initialized. Specify whether reloading data into DRAM is started by selecting the [YES] or [NO] soft key.

165


J.2.5 Menu for Transferring Data into FLASH ROM Memory

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

The following menu is displayed while data is being transferred from DRAM into flash ROM memory. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE


= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : EXECUTING [

][

][

][

][

]

While data is being loaded into flash ROM memory, ”EXECUTING” blinks.

166

J.2.6 Menu for end of Transfer of FLASH ROM Memory


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

When transferring data into flash ROM memory is completed, either of the following screens appears to indicate whether the transfer terminated normally.

(For normal termination) MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTER P-CODE LOADER (I/O PARAMETERS) I/O CHANNEL I/O UNIT BAUDRATE STOP BIT INPUT CODE


= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––

LOADING TO FLASH ROM : COMPLETE [

[ END ] :

][

][

][

][

END

]

Terminates the P-code loader function (IPL menu reappears).



= 0 = 1 =11 = 1 = 1

∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––––

(ERROR OCCURED) ILLEGAL CHARACTER LOADING RESTART ? : YES/NO [

][

][

YES

][

NO

][

]

[ YES ] : Starts reloading data into flash ROM memory. [ NO ] : Terminates loading (IPL menu reappears). Specify whether reloading data into flash ROM memory is started by selecting the [YES] or [NO] soft key.

167


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

J.2.7 Notes

(1) The Series 20 uses either channel 1 or 2 for input and output during loading. The Series 20 cannot use another channel for loading. (2) Either ASCII or ISO data can be transferred. EIA data is not supported. The ASI bit (bit 3 of parameter 101, 111, or 121) specifies whether ASCII or ISO data is being used. (3) The I/O parameters on the loading screen indicate the values of the RS-232-C parameters related to (1) and (2) above. The parameters cannot be specified using the loading screen. (4) Even if the PLD bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) for overwrite loading is set to 1, the operation of the macro compiler determines whether both the P-CODE and executor sections are transferred or if only the P-CODE section is transferred. (5) For the first loading after the RAM module is mounted, set the PLD bit (bit 1 of parameter 8701) to 0 so that the data including the executor section is loaded.

168


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

J.3 PARAMETER

Address 0020

I/O DEVICE SELECTION : I/O CHANNEL

Setting Entry Data type : Byte Data range : 0 to 3 Select an I/ O device used. 0 : Select a device connected to channel 1. (I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD) 1 : Select a device connected to channel 1. (I/O device connected to JD5A on MAIN CPU BOARD) 2 : Select a device connected to channel 2. (I/O device connected to JD5B on MAIN CPU BOARD) I/O device usable with P- CODE LOADER is either channel 1 or 2. Bit No. Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

0101

#3

#2

#1

ASI

Data type SB2

#0 SB2

: Bit : Number of stop bits: 0 : 1 bit 1 : 2 bits : Input data code: 0 : ISO 1 : ASCII

ASI

NOTE EIA code cannot be used for P-CODE LOADER. Address 0102

Specification no. of I/O device (when I/O channel=0)

Data type : Byte Set a specification number of I/O device when I/O Channel=0 according to Table 1. Table 1 Set value

Specification of I/O device

0

RS–232–C

1

FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)

2

FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)

3

FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR FANUC FLOOPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H

4

Unused

5

Portable tape reader

6

FANUC PPR FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H

Set 0 for P-CODE LOADER. 169


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Address 0103

Baud rate (For I/O CHANNEL=0)

Data type : Byte Set a baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=0 according to Table 2. Table 2 Set

Baud rate

Set

1

50

5

2

100

3

110

4

150

Baud rate

Set

Baud rate

20

9

2400

6

300

10

4800

7

600

11

9600

8

1200

12

19200

Set the same baud rate as the personal computer for P–CODE LOADER. Bit No. Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

0111

#3

#2

#1

ASI

#0 SB2

Data type : Bit These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=1. Meaning of each bit is the same as parameter no. 101. Address 0112

Specification number of I/O device (for I/O CHANNEL=1)

Data type : Byte Set specification number of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1 according to Table 1. Address 0113


Data type : Byte Baud rate of I/O device when I/O CHANNEL=1 according to Table 2. Bit No. Address

#7

#6

#5

0121

#4

#3

#2

ASI

#1

#0 SB2

Data type : Bit These parameters are those for I/O CHANNEL=2. The meaning of each bit is the same as parameter no. 101. Address 0122

Specification number of I/O device (I/O CHANNEL=2)

Data type : Byte Set the specification number of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2 according to Table 1. Address 0123


Data type : Byte Set baud rate of I/O device for I/O CHANNEL=2 according to Table 2. 170


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Bit No. Address

#7

8701

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

PLD

Data type : Bit PLD : P-CODE Loader of Macro Compiler/Executer 0 : Clears RAM of macro compiler and rewrites all contents. 1 : Do not clear RAM of macro compiler and overwrites it.

171


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

J.4 ALARMS

Message

Meaning

EXECUTER OPTION NOTHING

Macro executer option is not equipped.

I/O OPTION NOTHING


I/O OPTION (CH2) NOTHING


ILLEGAL CHANNEL

A channel other than channel 1 and 2 is selected.

ILLEGAL CHARACTER

Transferred data is not correct.

OVERRUN

Overrun error.

FRAMING ERROR

Framing error.

DSR SIGNAL OFF

Communication error.

PARITY ERROR

Data with no parity was transferred.

CHECK SUM ERROR

Check sum error.

UNKNOWN F-ROM MODULE OR NOT MOUNTED

F-ROM module is unknown or not mounted.

ILLEGAL ID INFORMATION

F-ROM file ID is incorrect.

NO SPACE

There is no space in F- ROM module.

ERASE ERROR

Deletion of F-ROM failed. F-ROM may be defective.

PROGRAM ERROR

Writing in F-ROM failed. F-ROM may be defective.

172

B–66102E/10

K

APPENDIX

K. BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

BOOT SYSTEM (FOR Series 15-B/15i-A)

173


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

K.1 OUTLINE

The boot system of the Series 15-B/15i-A first loads the CNC system software (Flash Memory (F-ROM) → DRAM), then starts execution of the CNC software so that other software can be executed. The Series 15-B/15i-A boot system supports the following system maintenance functions: (1) Registering a file in F-ROM D Reads a file to flash memory from an MS-DOS format memory card conforming to JEIDA V4.1. (2) Checking a file (series and edition) in F-ROM (3) Deleting a file from F-ROM (4) Writing a file in F-ROM to a memory card (5) Registering a ROM-format file stored on a macro cassette (ROM cassette) into F-ROM (only series 15-B) This appendix describes how to register/delete macro programs into/from the Series 15-B/15i-A by using the above functions. CAUTION 1 Memory card handling A memory card can be inserted or removed while the power is on. While the boot system is running, however, insert or remove a memory card only while the main menu is displayed. 2 ROM cassette handling (Only Series 15-B) Turn off the power before attempting to insert or remove a ROM cassette. * For the Series 15–B and 15i–A, the display numbers and order may differ. The operation method is, however, the same. In the text of this manual, the screens of the Series 15–B are used. For details of the Series 15i–A, refer to the Maintenance Manual (B–63325EN).

174

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


K.2 MEMORY CARD SPECIFICATIONS AND RESTRICTIONS

(a) Specifications For the Series 15-B/15i-A boot system, commercially available memory cards conforming to the following specification can be used: Format : JEIDA Ver. 4 or above Capacity : 512K bytes or more (for macro compilers) (b) Size of MEM-format file The following table lists the maximum size of a MEM-format file which can be saved to a memory card: MEM-format file

Size in memory card

256K bytes

262272 bytes (256K bytes + 128 bytes)

512K bytes

524416 bytes (512K bytes + 128 bytes)

NOTE A MEM-format file cannot be split and saved to two or more memory card. Always prepare a memory card having a capacity greater than the size of the MEM-format file to be saved. Two or more MEM-format files can be saved to a single memory card. (c) Restrictions imposed on the boot system The boot system can access only those files in the root directory. Files in a subdirectory cannot be accessed. In principle, for the boot system, do not use a memory card containing a subdirectory.

175


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

K.3 STARTING THE BOOT SYSTEM

The starting procedure depends on whether a MEM-format file is loaded from a memory card into F-ROM or whether a ROM-format file is loaded from a ROM cassette. Starting procedure Main menu item

”Page Up” key, ”Page Down” key

”⇐”, ”⇒” (Only Series 15–B)

SYSTEM DATA LOADING

Loads a file from a memory card into FROM.

Loads a file from a ROM cassette into F-ROM.

SYSTEM DATA CHECK

Lists the files, registered in F-ROM, and checks the file.

SYSTEM DATA SAVE

Saves a file, registered in F-ROM, to a memory card.

”Page Up” key, ”Page Down” key: Turn the power on while holding down the Page Up and Page Down keys. ”⇐”, ”⇒”: Turn the power on while holding down the ⇐ and ⇒ cursor keys. (Only Series 15–B) In both cases, the following boot system title screen appears.

RAM TEST : ROM TEST : DRAM ID : SRAM ID : FROM (CNC) : FROM (PMC) : CNC DATA SEARCH

END END 6014 H 0000 0000 0023 PASS : sEND

Fig. K.3 (a) Boot System Title Screen

The contents vary with the system being used.

176

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


After power-on, releasing the pressed keys causes the following boot system main menu to be displayed: SYSTEM MONITOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

SYSTEM DATA LOADING SYSTEM DATA CHECK SYSTEM DATA SAVE FILE DATA BACKUP END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT MODE AND HIT INPUT KEY

Fig. K.3 (b) Boot System Main Menu

177


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

K.4 REGISTERING A MEM–FORMAT FILE, STORED ON A MEMORY CARD, INTO F–ROM

(1) Insert the memory card in the memory card interface of the CNC unit. PMC

PSU

Series 15-B Memory card

Fig. K.4 (a) Mounting of a Memory Card

NOTE The PMC slot is used as the memory card interface (Main slot in case of series15i–A). The memory card can be inserted or removed while the power is turned on. When the boot system is active, make sure that the main menu [see Fig. K.3 (b)] is displayed on the screen before inserting or removing the memory card. Otherwise, proper access is not made, and the contents of the memory card files may be destroyed. (2) Turn on the power of the CNC unit while holding down the page-up and page-down keys. Then the boot system is activated. Refer to ”K.3. STARTING THE BOOT SYSTEM”.

178

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


(3) Select ”2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK” using the cursor keys and press the input key. The contents of F-ROM are retrieved, and the following information is displayed on the screen: SYSTEM DATA CHECK FILE DIRECTORY 1. OPTIONA3 ( 2) 2. HELP MSG ( 2) 3. DG SERVO ( 1) 4. NC BASIC (10) 5. PCD 256A ( 2) 6. PMC-NA0B ( 1) 7. MCR-CMPA ( 2) END

∗∗∗ MESSAGE ∗∗∗ SELECT FILE AND HIT INPUT KEY

Fig. K.4 (b) DATA CHECK DIRECTORY Screen

Check this screen to see if any MEM format file are (hereinafter called a P–CODE file) registered. If a MEM format file is already registered, its file name is displayed (see the table below). Table K.4 R CODE file names

D Series 15–B File name

Description

PCD 256A

For systems without a sub-CPU (256K bytes)

PCD 512A


PCD 256M

For systems with a sub-CPU (256K bytes)

PCD 512M


D Series 15i–A File name

Description

PD1M 256K

256 KB for M system

PD1M 0.5M

512 KB for M system

PD1M 1.0M

1024 KB for M system

(4) If a P-CODE file is already registered, delete it. To delete a P-CODE file, select it with the cursor, then press the ”delete” key. When no P-CODE file is registered, proceed to step 7. (5) The message ”DELETE OK?” appears. Make sure that the selected file is a P-CODE file, then press the input key. If the wrong file has been selected, press the cancel key. The DATA CHECK DIRECTORY screen [Fig. K.4 (b)] is then displayed again.

179


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

CAUTION When an attempt is made to delete a system file, such as a CNC program or the macro compiler, the message ”PROTECT FILE” appears on the screen and the attempt is rejected. However, the system deletes user files, such as the PMC ladder, without asking for confirmation. Once deletion has started, the process cannot be halted. If no backup file exists on a memory card or another storage medium, the contents of the file cannot be restored in any way. To avoid such inadvertent deletion of files, make sure that the correct file has been selected before deleting it. Also, back up user files at appropriate intervals.

(6) When the file has been successfully deleted, the message ”DELETE COMPLETED” appears. Press the input key. The DATA CHECK DIRECTORY screen [Fig. K.4 (b)] 1 is then displayed again. Confirm that the P-CODE file is no longer listed. (7) Select ”END” and press the input key. The main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)] is then displayed again. (8) Select ”1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING” using the cursor keys, then press the input key. The directories in the memory card are listed on the screen. SYSTEM DATA LOADING FILE DIRECTORY 1. 2. 3. 4. END

Title

LADDER1. ROM LADDER2. ROM TEST. DAT MACRO. ROM


Fig. K.4 (c) DATA LOADING DIRECTORY Screen

CAUTION If a ROM cassette error occurs, check the title. When the boot system has been activated by holding down the page-up and page-down keys, the title should read: SYSTEM DATA LOADING. If this title is not displayed, turn off the system power once, then turn it on again.

(9) Select the P-CODE file using the cursor keys, then press the input key. 180

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


(10)The message ”OK? INPUT/CANCEL” appears. To register the selected program, press the input key. To not register the selected file cancel, press the ”cancel” key. The DATA LOADING DIRECTORY screen [see Fig. K.4 (c)] is then displayed again. CAUTION The boot system registers any file having the acceptable format. Once registration has started, it cannot be halted. If no backup file exists on a memory card or another storage medium, the previously saved data of the file cannot be restored in any way. To avoid such inadvertent registration of files, make sure that the correct file has been selected before registering it. Also, back up files at appropriate intervals. (11)When the file has been successfully registered, the message ”PROGRAM COMPLETED” appears. Press the input key. The DATA LOADING DIRECTORY screen [see Fig. K.4 (c)] is then displayed again. (12)Select ”END” and press the input key. The main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)] is then displayed again. (13)Select ”2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK” to retrieve the contents of F-ROM. After confirming that the P-CODE file has been registered, press the input key to return the main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)]. (14)Select ”END” on the main menu and press the input key. The blinking message ”LOADING CNC DATA” appears. The CNC starts up about ten seconds later. (15)Make sure that the registered P-CODE file operates normally. (16)Remove the memory card from the memory card interface. The card can be removed even when the CNC power is on.

181


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

K.5 SAVING A MEM–FORMAT FILE FROM F–ROM TO A MEMORY CARD

(1) Insert the memory card in the memory card interface of the CNC unit to activate the boot system. See steps 1 and 2 of Sec.K.4, Procedure for registering a P-CODE file in a memory card to F-ROM. (2) Select ”3. SYSTEM DATA SAVE” using the cursor keys, then press the input key. The contents of F-ROM are retrieved, and the following information is displayed on the screen: SYSTEM DATA SAVE FILE DIRECTORY 1. OPTIONA1 ( 2) 2. HELP MSG ( 2) 3. DGTL SRV ( 1) 4. NC BASIC (10) 5. PCD 256A ( 2) 6. PMC-NA0B ( 1) 7. MCR-CMPA ( 2) END


Fig. K.5 DATA SAVE DIRECTORY Screen

(3) Select one of the P-CODE files listed below using the cursor, then press the input key. D Series 15–B File name

Description

PCD 256A


PCD 512A


PCD 256M


PCD 512M


D Series 15i–A File name

Description

PD1M 256K

256 KB for M system

PD1M 0.5M

512 KB for M system

PD1M 1.0M


NOTE System files, such as the CNC program or the micro compiler, cannot be saved (if you attempt to save one of these files, the message ”PROTECT FILE” is displayed).

182

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


(4) The message ”INPUT FILE NAME” appears. Input the file name using the MDI key. A file must be named according to MS-DOS file naming rules; that is, a file name consisting of up to eight characters followed by a three-character or shorter extension. During file name input: D The cursor can be moved using the cursor (² and ³) keys. D The cancel key functions as the backspace key. D Pressing the reset key displays the DATA SAVE DIRECTORY screen [Fig. K.5] again. D Characters are input in the overwrite mode. (5) After inputting the file name, press the input key to save the file. (6) If the save operation terminates normally, the message ”SAVE COMPLETED” appears. Press the input key. The DATA SAVE DIRECTORY screen [Fig. K.5] is then displayed again. (7) Select ”END” and press the input key. The main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)] is then displayed again.

183


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

K.6 REGISTERING A ROM–FORMAT FILE, STORED ON A ROM CASSETTE, INTO F–ROM

(1) Connect the ROM cassette into which the program has been written using System P or a personal computer to the ROM cassette adapter (A20B-2000-0760).

ROM cassette adapter (A20B-2000-0760)

ROM cassette

Fig. K.6 (a) Connection of the ROM Cassette to the ROM Cassette Adapter

(2) Turn off the power of the CNC unit, then insert the ROM cassette adapter into the mini slot of the CNC unit. The mini slot is on the PSU and is protected with a cover when not in use. PMC

PSU

Series 15-B

ROM cassette

ROM cassette adapter

Fig. K.6 (b) Connection of the ROM Cassette Adapter to the CNC Unit

CAUTION Be sure to turn off the power of the CNC unit before inserting or removing the ROM cassette. Inserting or removing the adapter while the CNC power is on can not only damage the CNC unit and the ROM cassette but can also destroy battery-retained data, such as NC programs and parameters.

184

B–66102E/10

APPENDIX


(3) Turn on the power of the CNC unit while holding down the cursor (← and →) keys, and the boot system is activated. Refer to ”K.3 STARTING THE BOOT SYSTEM”. (4) Check the contents of F-ROM. If a P-CODE file is already registered, delete it. For the deletion procedure, see 2 Procedure for registering a P-CODE file in a memory card to F-ROM, steps (3) to (7) in Sec.K.4. (5) Select ”SYSTEM DATA LOADING” using the cursor keys, then press the input key. The following contents of the ROM cassette are read and displayed on the screen: Title

SYSTEM DATA LOADING (CASSETTE) P-CODE 256K (WITHOUT SUB-CPU)

ROM type Format file


Fig. K.6 (c) DATA LOADING DIRECTORY Screen (for ROM Cassette)

The type of mounted ROM cassette (ROM format file) is displayed (see the table below). If the displayed ROM cassette type does not agree with that of the connected ROM cassette, check the ROM cassette. ROM cassette/ROM format file

Description

1M-bit ROM without a sub-CPU

P-CODE 256K (without sub-CPU)

2M-bit ROM without a sub- CPU

P-CODE 512K (without sub-CPU)

1M-bit ROM with a sub-CPU

P-CODE 256K (with sub-CPU)

2M-bit ROM with a sub-CPU

P-CODE 512K (with sub-CPU)

CAUTION If an alarm related to the memory card occurs or when displaying memory card directories, confirm the title. When the CNC unit has been activated with the cursor (² and ³) keys pressed down, the title should read: SYSTEM DATA LOADING (CASSETTE) If this title is not displayed, activate the CNC unit again. (6) The message ”OK? INPUT/CANCEL” appears. To register the P-CODE file, press the input key. To not resister the P-CODE file, press the ”cancel” key. Then the main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)] is then displayed again. (7) When the file has been successfully registered, the message ”PROGRAM COMPLETED” appears. Press the input key. The main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)] is then displayed again. 185


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

(8) Select ”2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK” to retrieve the contents of F-ROM. After confirming that the P-CODE file has been registered in F-ROM. Press the input key to return the main menu [Fig. K.3 (b)]. (9) Turn off the power of the CNC unit, and remove the ROM cassette adapter from the mini slot. After removing the adapter, place the cover over the slot to protect it. CAUTION Avoid using the CNC unit while the ROM cassette remains in its mini slot. If the CNC unit is used without removing the ROM cassette, the data stored in the ROM cassette takes precedence, disabling the use of the micro compiler and P-CODE file program resident in F-ROM. (10)Make sure that the registered P-CODE file operates normally.

186

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10


K.7 TYPES OF FILES IN F–ROM

The following table lists the macro compiler/executer file names displayed on the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen: D Series 15–B Displayed name MCR-CMPA

Type

Description

S

Macro compiler for systems without a sub-CPU

MCR-CMPM

S

Macro compiler for systems with a sub-CPU

PCD 256A

U

Macro program (256K bytes) for systems without a sub-CPU

PCD 512A

U

Macro program (512K bytes) for systems without a sub-CPU

PCD 256M

U

Macro program (256K bytes) for systems with a sub-CPU

PCD 512M

U

Macro program (512K bytes) for systems with a sub-CPU

D Series 15i–A Displayed name

Type

Description

PD1M 256K

U

256 KB for M system

PD1M 0.5M

U

512 KB for M system

PD1M 1.0M

U


Type Symbols: S : System file supplied by FANUC. The following operations cannot be performed on system files: D Saving to a memory card D Deletion from F-ROM NOTE The system files are necessary when a custom macro program is directly compiled by the Series 15-B. U:

Data file created by the user. All supported file access operations can be performed.

187

L. NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY

L

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

NAME OF MACRO LIBRARY

Library file names of macro library are listed below: Table L.1 List of Macro Library File Names System name

Specification

Library file name

Remarks

MACRO LIBRARY (0)

A08B–9001–J600#ZZ03

FOMC_xx.MEX FOTC_xx.MEX FOTTC_xx.MEX

Series 0–MC Series 0–TC Series 0–TC (Sub side)

FANUC Series 0i MACRO LIBRARIES

A08B–9001–J764#ZZ03

F0IMA_xx.MEX F0ITA_xx.MEX

Series 0i–MA Series 0i–TA

MACRO LIBRARY (16)

A08B–9001–J610#ZZ03

F16MA_xx.MEX F16TA_xx.MEX F16TTS xx.MEX F16LR_xx.MEX F16MB_xx.MEX F16MMB xx.MEX F16TB_xx.MEX F16TTB xx.MEX F16LTB xx.MEX F16LMB xx.MEX F16MC_xx.MEX F16MMC xx.MEX F16TC_xx.MEX F16TTC xx.MEX F16LTC xx.MEX F16LMC xx.MEX

Series 16–MA Series 16–TA Series 16–TTA (Sub side) For loader control (Model A) Series 16–MB Series 16–MB (Sub side) Series 16–TB Series 16–TB (Sub side) For T Series loader control (Model B) For M Series loader control (Model B) Series 16–MC Series 16–MC (Sub side) Series 16–TC Series 16–TC (Sub side) For T Series loader control (Model C) For M Series loader control (Model C)

FANUC Series 16i–A MACRO LIBRARIES

A08B–9001–J760#ZZ07

F16MI_xx.MEX F16TI_xx.MEX F16TMM_xx.MEX F16TMT_xx.MEX

Series 16i–MA Series 16i–TA Series 16i–TMM (Sub side/M series) Series 16i–TMT (Main side/T series)

FANUC Series 16i–B MACRO LIBRARIES

A08B–9001–J830#ZZ07

16IMB_xx.MEX 16ITB_xx.MEX 16TMMB_xx.MEX 16TMTB_xx.MEX

Series 16i–MB Series 16i–TB Series 16i–TMB (Sub side/M series) Series 16i–TMB (Main side/T series)

MACRO LIBRARY (18)

A08B–9001–J625#ZZ03

F18MA_xx.MEX F18TA_xx.MEX F18TTSxx.MEX F18LR_xx.MEX F18MB_xx.MEX F18TB_xx.MEX F18TTBxx.MEX F18LTBxx.MEX F18LMBxx.MEX F18MC_xx.MEX F18TC_xx.MEX F18TTCxx.MEX F18LTCxx.MEX F18LMCxx.MEX

Series 18–MA Series 18–TA Series 18–TTA (Sub side) For loader control (Model A) Series 18–MB Series 18–TB Series 18–TB (Sub side) For T Series loader control (Model B) For M Series loader control (Model B) Series 18–MC Series 18–TC Series 18–TC (Sub side) For T Series loader control (Model C) For M Series loader control (Model C)


A08B–9001–J765#ZZ07

F18MI_xx.MEX F18TI_xx.MEX F18TMM_xx.MEX F18TMT_xx.MEX

Series 18i–MA Series 18i–TA Series 18i–TMM (Sub side/M series) Series 18i–TMT (Main side/T series)

188

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

System name

Specification


Library file name

Remarks


A08B–9001–J831#ZZ07

F18IMB_xx.MEX F18ITB_xx.MEX 18TMMB_xx.MEX 18TMTB_xx.MEX

Series 18i–MB Series 18i–MB Series 18i–TMB (Sub side/M series) Series 18i–TMB (Main side/T series)

MACRO LIBRARY (16 P/L/W)

A08B–9001–J613#ZZ03

F16LA_xx.MEX F16PA_xx.MEX F16WA_xx.MEX F16LB_xx.MEX F16PB_xx.MEX

Series 16–LA Series 16–PA Series 16–WA Series 16–LB Series 16–PB

MACRO LIBRARY (15A)

A08B–9001–J620#ZZ03

F15_A_xx.MEX F15_B_xx.MEX

Series 15–A W/0 sub Series 15–A with sub (Main side 256K byte) Series 15–A with sub (Sub side 256K byte) Series 15–A with sub (Main side 512K byte) Series 15–A with sub (Sub side 512K byte)

F15_C_xx.MEX F15_D_xx.MEX F15_E_xx.MEX MACRO LIBRARY (15B)

A08B–9001–J640#ZZ03

F15B_Axx.MEX F15B_Bxx.MEX F15B_Cxx.MEX F15B_Dxx.MEX F15B_Exx.MEX F15B_Fxx.MEX

Series 15–B W/O sub 256K byte Series 15–B W/O sub 512K byte Series 15–B with sub (Main side 256K byte) Series 15–B with sub (Sub side 256K byte) Series 15–B with sub (Main side 512K byte) Series 15–B with sub (Sub side 512K byte)

FANUC Series 15i MACRO LIBRARIES

A08B–9001–J640#ZZ07

F15IA_xx.MEX

For Series 15i–MA

MACRO LIBRARY (21MB)

A08B–9001–J690#ZZ03

F20MA_xx.MEX

Series 21–MB (D201 series)

F21MB_xx.MEX

Series 21–MB (DDA1 series)

MACRO LIBRARY (21TA)

A08B–9001–J633#ZZ03

PMDT_xx.MEX

Series 21–TA (8860 series)

F21TA_xx.MEX

Series 21–TA (8865,8866 series)

MACRO LIBRARY (21TB)

A08B–9001–J639#ZZ03

F21TB_xx.MEX

Series 21–TB (controller A) (DE01 series)

F21TBN_xx.MEX

Series 21–TB (controller B) (DEA1 series)

MACRO LIBRARY (21TB)

A08B–9001–J639#ZZ03

F21LTB_xx.MEX

Series 21–TB (loader control)


A08B–9001–J769#ZZ07

F21MI_xx.MEX F21TI_xx.MEX

Series 21i–MA Series 21i–TA


A08B–9001–J832#ZZ07

F21IMB_xx.MEX F21ITB_xx.MEX

Series 21i–MB Series 21i–TB

MACRO LIBRARY (20F G)

A08B–9001–J670#ZZ03

DZ70_xx.MEX

Series 20–FA (512K byte)

MACRO LIBRARY (20F GP)

A08B–9001–J671#ZZ03

DZ71_xx.EE1 DZ71_xx.EE2

With Series 20–FA Guidance Programming function (1M byte) POC PRG.SRC FACE PRG.SRC DRILL PR.SRC SIDE PRG.SRC With Series 20–TA Guidance Programming function

189


System name

APPENDIX

Specification

B–66102E/10

Library file name

Remarks

MACRO LIBRARY (20F GB)

A08B–9001–J672#ZZ03

DZ72_xx.MEX

Series 20–FA (1M byte)

MACRO LIBRARY (20F GPB)

A08B–9001–J673#ZZ03

DZ73_xx.EX1 DZ73_xx.EX2

With Series 20–FA Guidance Programming function (1.5M byte) POC PRG.SRC FACE PRG.SRC DRILL PR.SRC SIDE PRG.SRC With Series 20–TA Guidance Programming function

MACRO LIBRARY (20T G)

A08B–9001–J675#ZZ03

DZ75_xx.MEX

Series 20–TA (512K byte)

MACRO LIBRARY (20T GP)

A08B–9001–J676#ZZ03


With Series 20–TA Guidance Programming function (1M byte)

MACRO LIBRARY (20T GP)

A08B–9001–J677#ZZ03

DZ77_xx.MEX

Series 20–TA (1M byte)

MACRO LIBRARY (20T GPB)

A08B–9001–J678#ZZ03


With Series 20–TA Guidance Programming function (1.5M byte)

MACRO LIBRARY (20F B)

A08B–9001–J750#ZZ03

DZ62_xx.MEX

For Series 20–FA (1 MB) The FANUC standard machining guidance cannot be used.

MACRO LIBRARY (20F GB)

A08B–9001–J751#ZZ03


For Series 20–FA (1.5 MB) The FANUC standard machining guidance cannot be used. With guidance programming function

NOTE xx in a library file name indicates the edition of the library. Executer file is defined as follows. Series 15–A CNC system/ROM cassette type

CNC=

CNC2=

without SUB CPU / 256Kbyte

F15_A_xx.MEX

nothing


F15_A_xx.MEX

nothing

with SUB CPU

/ 256Kbyte

F15_B_xx.MEX

F15_C_xx.MEX

with SUB CPU

/ 512Kbyte

F15_D_xx.MEX

F15_E_xx.MEX

CNC3=

nothing

Series 15–B CNC system/Kind of P–CODE file

CNC=

CNC2=


F15B_Axx.MEX

nothing


F15B_Bxx.MEX

nothing

with SUB CPU

/ 256Kbyte

F15B_Cxx.MEX

F15B_Dxx.MEX

with SUB CPU

/ 512Kbyte

F15B_Exx.MEX

F15B_Fxx.MEX

190

CNC3=

nothing

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

M

M. PARAMETERS

PARAMETERS

This section describes the compiler parameters and executor parameter for the CNC system excluding Series 15. For the parameters of Series 15, refer to the manuals listed below., 1) FANUC Series 15 Programming Manual (Macro compiler/Macro executor) (B–61213E–1) 2) FANUC Series 15–MODEL B Programming Manual (Macro Compiler/Macro executor) (B–62073E–2)

191

M. PARAMETERS

M.1 SERIES 15i COMPILE PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

The compile parameters are initialized to the values set in the P–CODE file at power–up. The parameters cannot be changed from MDI or others. However, parameters 8547 and 8548, which are used for debugging, can be set from MDI. Bit No. Address

#7

8500

LD6

R05 R10

#6

#5

#4

R10

#3

#2

#1

#1

#0

R05

Size of P–CODE file R10

R05

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 1

Size of P–CODE file 256Kbyte 512Kbyte 1Mbyte Not defined

LD6 = 1: This bit must always be set 1. Bit No. Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

8502

NPE

TMC

EUI

VAR

DBG

SBK

DIR

#0 DIR

= 0 : The program list screen does not show P–CODE macro program numbers. = 1 : The program list screen shows P–CODE macro program numbers.

NOTE P–CODE macro program names cannot be displayed. SBK

DBG VAR EUI

TMC

NPE

= 0 : When the conversational macro or auxiliary macro is executed with the debug function, continuous execution is performed. = 1 : When the conversational macro or auxiliary macro is executed with the debug function, single–block execution is performed. = 0 : The debug function is not used. = 1 : The debug function is used. = 0 : The P–CODE macro variable screen cannot be displayed. = 1 : The P–CODE macro variable screen can be displayed. = 0 : The P–CODE macro uses UI00 to UI15 and UO00 to UO15 as UI/UO signals. = 1 : The P–CODE macro uses EUI00 to EUI15 and EUO00 to EUO15 as UI/UO signals. = 0 : An execution macro call by a T code is a subprogram call of O90000. = 1 : An execution macro call by a T code is a macro call of O90008. = 0 : Under RS–232–C control, % (EOF) is automatically output. = 1 : Under RS–232–C control, % (EOF) is not automatically output. 192

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Bit No. Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

8503

MV7

MV6

MV5

MV4

MV3

MV2

MV1

MV0

MVA

MV9

MV8

ECK

8504

= 0 : P–CODE macro common variables (#100 to #999) are also used as custom macro common variables. = 1 : P–CODE macro common variables (#100 to #999) are independent of custom macro common variables. The following bits of the two parameters set the range of common variables. No.8503 MV0 : #100 to 149 MV1 : #150 to 199 MV2 : #500 to 549 MV3 : #550 to 599 MV4 : #600 to 699 MV5 : #700 to 799 MV6 : #800 to 899 MV7 : #900 to 999

No. 8504 MV8 : #200 to 299 MV9 : #300 to 399 MVA : #400 to 499

ECK

= 0 : Command input variable #8501 does not expand the command keys that can be read. = 1 : Command input variable #8501 expands the command keys that can be read. After the expansion, the following command keys can be read: Function menu key

22

Function key

POS

23

Function key

PROG

24

System

27

Function key

OFFSET SETTING

25

Function key

CUSTOM

26

Function key

Function key

MESSAGE

28

Function key

GRAPH

29

Function key

30

NOTE If the expansion is performed, pressing any of the command keys does not terminate the conversational macro function. Accordingly, the corresponding screen is not displayed. Conversational macro start control variable #8510 must be set to 0 to terminate the conversational macro function. Bit No. Address

#7

8507

CAN

NTV

#6

#5 PWS

#4

#3

#2

#1

NTV

CAN

#0

= 0 : While the system is waiting for data transmission or reception under reader/puncher interface control, no interruption can be made by pressing the CAN key. = 1 : While the system is waiting for data transmission or reception under reader/puncher interface control, an interruption can be made by pressing the CAN key. = 0 : G336 (data transmission) outputs a blank character for performing a TV check. = 1 : G336 (data transmission) does not output a blank character for performing a TV check. 193

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

PWS

B–66102E/10

= 0 : The P–CODE work number search is disabled. = 1 : The P–CODE work number search is enabled. Bit No.

Address

#7

#6

#5

8508

PGR

CLG

B5C

AC1 AC2 TEC SSC BSC

=0: =1: =0: =1: =0: =1: =0: =1: =0:

PCR

#3

#2

#1

#0

SSC

TEC

AC2

AC1

A subprogram call (O9004) by a special code is disabled. A subprogram call (O9004) by a special code is enabled. A subprogram call (O9005) by a special code is disabled. A subprogram call (O9005) by a special code is enabled. A subprogram or macro call by a T code is disabled. A subprogram or macro call by a T code is enabled. A subprogram call by an S code is disabled. A subprogram call by an S code is enabled. A subprogram call by the secondary miscellaneous function code is disabled. A subprogram call by the secondary miscellaneous function code is enabled. Cutting distance summation/preset (#8554) is disabled. Cutting distance summation/preset (#8554) is enabled. CNC program referencing/writing, cutting distance summation/preset, and RS–232–C control are disabled. CNC program referencing/writing, cutting distancesummation/preset, and RS–232–C control are enabled.

=1: CLG

#4

=0: =1: =0: =1:

Bit No. Address

#7

8509

GMP

EV1

EV2

MCT

PTC

GMP

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

PTC

MCT

EV2

EV1

= 0 : Expansion P–CODE variables (#40000 and after) are floating–point data. = 1 : Expansion P–CODE variables (#40000 and after) are integer data. = 0 : P–CODE variables (#30000 and after) are floating–point data. = 1 : P–CODE variables (#30000 and after) are integer data. = 0 : A modal macro call by a G code is a move command call (equivalent to G66). = 1 : A modal macro call by a G code is a call in each block (equivalent to G66.1). = 0 : When a macro variable is output, EOB is output as LF. = 1 : When a macro variable is output, EOB is output as LF CR CR. = 0 : The following calls are enabled: call by an M, S, T, secondary miscellaneous function, or special code or by an axis address during a G–code call, and a G–code call during a call by an M, S, T, secondary miscellaneous function, or special code or by an axis address.

194

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

M. PARAMETERS

= 1 : The following calls are disabled: call by an M, S, T, secondary miscellaneous function, or special code or by an axis address during a G–code call, and a G–code call during a call by an M, S, T, secondary miscellaneous function, or special code or by an axis address. (This type of call is processed as a normal NC command.) Address 8510

M code of subprogram call for calling program 9001

8511


8512


Valid data range : 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99) These parameters specify M codes of subprogram calls for calling programs 9001, 9002, and 9003. Address 8513

G code of subprogram call for calling program 9010

8514


8515


8516


8517


8518


8519


8520


8521


8522


Valid data range : –999 to 999 (excluding 0, 65, 66, and 67) These parameters specify G codes of macro calls for calling programs 9010 to 9019.

195

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Address 8523


8524


8525


8526


8527


8528


8529


8530


8531


8532


Valid data range : 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99) These parameters specify M codes of macro calls for calling programs 9020 to 9029. Address 8533

M code of subprogram call for calling a user program

Valid data range : 1 to 9999 (excluding 30, 98, and 99) This parameter specifies an M code of subprogram call for calling a user program. Address 8536

Main program number of conversational macro

Valid data range : 1 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the main program number of the conversational macro. NOTE 1 The program number of this parameter is set in the conversational macro execution control variable at power–up.

Address 8537

Main program number of auxiliary macro

Valid data range : 1 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the main program number of the auxiliary macro. NOTE 1 The program number of this parameter is set in the auxiliary macro execution control variable at power–up.

196

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

M. PARAMETERS

Address 8538

Call code of subprogram call by a range specification M code (lower limit)

8539

Call code of subprogram call by a range specification M code (upper limit)

Valid data range : 1 to 9999 These parameters specify the range of call codes of subprogram calls by a range specification M code. NOTE 1 If a value beyond the range is specified or if the value of parameter 8538 is greater than the value of parameter 8539, the subprogram call by a range specification M code is disabled. 2 M30, M98, M99, and M codes used for macro and subprogram calls are not used as call codes even if the codes are included in the specified range.

Address 8540

Transmission/receptionwait time–out period (s)

Valid data range : 0 to 180 This parameter specifies a time–out period for the transmission/reception wait state brought by the send/receive function (G335 to G338) under reader/puncher interface control. If 0 is specified, no time–out occurs. Address 8544

Call address of subprogram call by a special code (O9004)

8545

Call address of subprogram call by a special code (O9005)

Valid data range : 65(A) to 90(Z) (excluding O, N, P, L, G, and axis names) These parameters specify call addresses of subprogram calls by a special code.

197

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Address 8546

Number of G–code macro calls (multiple) to be defined

8551

First G code for G–code macro calls (multiple)

8552

First program number of G–code macro calls (multiple)

Valid data range : Parameter 8546: 1 to 255 Parameter 8551: –9999 to 9999 (excluding 0) Parameter 8552: 1 to 9999 Parameter 8546 specifies the number of G–code macro calls (multiple) to be programmed. Parameter 8551 specifies the first one of the code numbers used for the calls. Parameter 8552 specifies the first program number of the execution macro. If a negative value is specified in parameter 8551, a modal call is executed. The MCT bit (bit 2 of parameter 8509) specifies whether the modal call is executed as a move command call (G66) or as a call in each block (G66.1). NOTE The G–code macro call (multiple) is disabled in the following cases: 1 A value beyond the valid range is specified in any of the parameters. 2 The highest G code exceeds 9999. 3 The highest program number exceeds 9999. G65, G66, G67, and G codes specified for macro calls are not used as call codes even if they are included in the range.

Address 8547

Number of the conversational or auxiliary macro program in which a break occurs

Valid data range : 0 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the number of the conversational or auxiliary macro program in which a break is caused by the debug function. NOTE If either this parameter or parameter 8548 is set to a non–zero value when the conversational macro is executed, a break is enabled. The program number specified in this parameter and the sequence number specified in parameter 8548 are set as break conditions.

198

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Address 8548

Number of the conversational or auxiliary macro sequence in which a break occurs

Valid data range : 0 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the number of the conversational or auxiliary macro sequence in which a break is caused by the debug function. NOTE If either this parameter or parameter 8547 is set to a non–zero value when the conversational macro is executed, a break is enabled. The sequence number specified in this parameter and the program number specified in parameter 8547 are set as break conditions.

Address 8549

Number of P–CODE variables (#30000 and after)

Valid data range : 0 to 100 This parameter specifies the number of P–CODE variables. The setting of the EV2 bit (bit 1 of parameter 8509) affects the number of variables that are actually defined, as follows: When EV2 is set to 0 (floating point data): (Value of parameter 8549) 40 Wen EV2 is set to 1 (integer data): (Value of parameter 8549) 100 Address 8550

Number of expansion P–CODE variables (#4000 and after)

Valid data range : 0 to 1970 This parameter specifies the number of expansion P–CODE variables. The setting of the EV1 bit (bit 0 of parameter 8509) affects the number of variables that are actually defined, as follows: When EV1 is set to 0 (floating–point data): (Value of parameter 8550) 10 Wen EV1 is set to 1 (integer data): (Value of parameter 8550) 30 Bit No. Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

8555

X08

X07

X06

X05

X04

X03

X02

X01

8556

X16

X15

X14

X13

X12

X10

X09

X08

8557

X24

X23

X22

X21

X20

X19

X18

X17

= 0 : A macro call by an axis address is disabled. = 1 : A macro call by an axis address is enabled. 199

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

The bits of the parameters select different axes. No.8555 X01 : First axis X02 : Second axis : No. 8504 : X24 : Twenty–fourth axis Bit No. Address

#7

8558

ACS

XDL PWT

15I

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

ACA

P98

15I

PWT

XDL

ACS

= 0 : A macro call by an axis address always calls O9009. = 1 : A macro call by an axis address calls a program depending on the axis. First axis ! Calls O9031. Second axis ! Calls O9032. : n–th axis ! Calls a program having an O number of 9030 + n. = 0 : Interlock along an axis is disabled. = 1 : Interlock along an axis is enabled. = 0 : The conversational macro function is not executed at power–up. = 1 : The conversational macro function is executed at power–up. The position display screen is normally displayed at power–up, but the conversational macro function can be executed to display a special screen. = 0 : The macro executor function follows Series 15–B compatible specifications. = 1 : The macro executor function follows original specifications for the Series 15i. This bit selects the following specifications: Series 15–B specifications (15I = 0)

Function

Series 15i specifications (15I = 1)

Character coordinate system System display part Soft key frame Key input line Command key input variable by parameter 8501

X0 to 73, Y0 to 26

X0 to 79, Y0 to 26

FS15–B

FS15i

Y22 The INSERT, ALTER, and DELETE keys cannot be read.

Method of executing both auxiliary macro and conversational macro

Sequential execution (After the program end command of the auxiliary macro is executed, the conversational macro is executed.) When a foreground PS alarm or MC alarm is issued

Y23 The keys can be read. INSERT : 31 ALTER : 32 DELETE : 33 Parallel execution

Alarm information of window function (foreground PS alarm of alarm basic flags)

200

When a foreground PS alarm is issued. An MC alarm can be read with basic flag 2.)

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

P98

ACA

M. PARAMETERS

= 0 : The execution macro for P–CODE work number search is called by a macro call. A local variable used by the execution macro cannot be used in the main program. = 1 : The execution macro for P–CODE work number search is called by a subprogram call. A local variable used by the execution macro is taken over to the main program. = 0 : A macro call by a T code or axis address always passes an argument without decimal point as an integer value. = 1 : A macro call by a T code or axis address passes an argument without decimal point, adding a decimal point according to the setting of the DPI bit (bit 0 of parameter 2400).

Address 8570

Graphic coordinate system shift amount (X–axis)

8571

Graphic coordinate system shift amount (Y–axis)

Valid data range : –320 to 319 (X–axis), –216 to 231 (Y–axis) These parameters specify the shift amounts of the graphic coordinate system in dots. Address 8572

Address of the interlock mode signal of an axis

8573

Bit position of the interlock mode signal of an axis

Valid data range : 0 to 7 These parameters specify a PMC internal relay (R area) signal that determines the control mode of the interlock function of an axis. Address : R area number Bit position : Bit position of the signal NOTE The interlock function of an axis is disabled when: 1 The address refers to a position beyond the R area. 2 The bit position is incorrect.

Address 8574

P–CODE common variable (#500 to #999) protect range (top)

8575

P–CODE common variable (#500 to #999) protect range (bottom)

Valid data range : 500 to 999 These parameters specify the range of battery–backed P–CODE common variables (#500 to #999) to be write–protected. NOTE If a value beyond the range is specified or if the value of parameter 8574 is larger than the value of parameter 8575, no write protection is provided.

201

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Address 8576

P–CODE common variable (#200 to #499) protect range (top)

8577

P–CODE common variable (#200 to #499) protect range (bottom)

Valid data range : 200 to 499 These parameters specify the range of battery–backed P–CODE common variables (#200 to #499) to be write–protected. NOTE If a value beyond the range is specified or if the value of parameter 8576 is larger than the value of parameter 8577, no write protection is provided.

202

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

M.2 PARAMETERS OTHER THAN SERIES 15i M.2.1 Compile Parameters NOTE Usually, undefined parameters need to be set to 0. Bit No. Address Compile parameter

#7

9000

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

M3MB

M2MB

M1MB

M512

M256

M128

#6

#5

#2

#1

#0

Bit No. Address Compile parameter

#7

#4

#3

9001

#0

M4MB

M4MB

M3MB

M2MB

M1MB

M512

M256

M128

4.0MB

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

3.0MB

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

2.0MB

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1.0MB

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

512KB

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

256KB

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

128KB

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

NOTE 1 For the 21-TB (controller A), always specify 128 KB. 2 For the Series 16, a 128-KB ROM-format file cannot be specified. 3 For the 21-MB or, 21-TB (controller B), no more than 1.0 MB can be specified. 4 For the 0i–A, no more than 512 KB can be specified. Bit No. Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

9002

EXT1

PWSR

DAUX

XDIL

EVF

ACL2

ACL1

TCAL

TCAL ACL1 ACL2 EVF

=0: =1: =0: =1: =0: =1: =0:

Makes invalid the sub-program call with T code Makes effective the sub-program call with T code Makes invalid call by the specific code Makes effective call by the specific code (O9004/#146) Makes invalid call by the specific code Makes effective call by the specific code (O9005/#147) Extension P-CODE variable #20000 is the floating decimal point format 203

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

= 1 : Extension P-CODE variable #20000 is the fixed decimal format XDIL = 0 : Axis interlock function invalid = 1 : Axis interlock function valid DAUX = 0 : Does not make the CUSTOM screen appear at power on = 1 : Makes CUSTOM screen appear at power on PWSR = 0 : P CODE work number search function invalid = 1 : P CODE work number search valid EXT1 = 0: Extension functions invalid = 1: Extension functions valid (RS-232-C control, NC program access) CAUTION When EXT1=1, part program memory reduces by 1.63m D Series 16/18–A (part program storage of up to 80m) D Series 20 (part program storage of up to 80m) D Series 21–MB (D201 series, part program storage of up to 80m) D Series 21–TB (control unit A) Bit No. Address

#7

9003

#6

#5

PTCR

KY20

#4

#3

#2

#1

HRGR

#0 ONMSK

ONMSK= 0 : The O and N numbers are displayed on the CUSTOM screen. = 1 : The O and N numbers are not displayed on the CUSTOM screen. HRGR = 0 : Standard mode graphic display = 1 : High resolution graphic mode display (set to H1I usually) KY20 = 0 : Not +a to #8501 with decimal point input by key input variables = 1 : +a to #8501 with decimal input by key input variables (+a: +20 for a display with 7 soft keys, +40 for a display with 12 soft keys)

PTCR

= 0 : Does not output ”CR” code twice in P-CODE variable outputting = 1 : Output ”CR” code twice in P-CODE variable outputting Bit No.

Address 9004

#7

#6

CUTLG NOP_B

#5

#4 HRGC

SP_G_B, SP_G_C 00 : Standard G code system 01 : G code system B 10 : G code system C 11 : G code system C 204

#3

#2 IMG

#1

#0

SP_G_C SP_G_B

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

IMG

= 0 : 16-T type (Special G code) = 1 : 16-G type (Special G code)

HRGC = 0 : 9I high resolusion monochrome CRT, standard = 1 : 9I high resolution monochrome CRT, brightness modulation mode setting (paint) NOP_B = 0 : When no other address is specified in a block that calls a subprogram by a T or M code, the block is executed. = 1 : The block is not executed. CUTLG = 0 : Does not count cutting distance = 1 : Count cutting distance Bit No. Address

#7

9005

TMACC

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

AXCLS

AX4CL

AX3CL

AX2CL

AX1CL

AX1CL = 0 : =1: AX2CL = 0 : =1: AX3CL = 0 : =1: AX4CL = 0 : =1: AXCLS = 0 :

Macro program call by the 1st address is invalid Macro program call by the 1st address is valid Macro program call by the 2nd address is invalid Macro program call by the 2nd address is valid Macro program call by the 3rd address is invalid Macro program call by the 3rd address is valid Macro program call by the 4th address is invalid Macro program call by the 4th address is valid Always program O9009 is called irrespective of specified axes. = 1 : The program number to be called depends on a specified axis: Program O9031 is called when 1st axis is specified. Program O9032 is called when 2nd axis is specified. : : Program O9038 is called when 8th axis is specified. TMACC= 0 : Macro call by T code is invalid = 1 : Macro call by T code is valid Bit No. Address

#7

9006

DIOC

#6 NNUM

#5

#4

#3

US19W CNCHG DAUXR

#2

#1

#0

STDM

KEYC

DIOC

= 0 : Standard UI:G54/G55 and UO:F54/F55 are used for UI/UO(#1000-#1132) of execution macro/ conversational macro. = 1 : UI:G82/G83 and UO:F84/F85 are used for UI/UO (#1000-#1132) of execution macro/ conversational macro.

KEYC = 0 : When KEY switch =0, completion code #8529=254 in an access to NC program = 1 : KEY switch is not cheched in an access to NC program STDM = 0 : The mode and status display is changed on the USER-1, USER-2, and USER-3 screens on which the conversational macro screen is displayed. = 1 : The mode and status display is left unchanged on the USER-1, USER-2, and USER-3 screens on which the conversational macro screen is displayed. 205

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

DAUXR

:

Address

#7

B–66102E/10

The conversational macro screen is displayed when power is turned on while the system is in the emergency stop state or external reset state. (Parameter DAUX (No. 9002, #5) must also be set to 1.) CNCHG : Execution of the conversational macro is continued when the CUSTM key is pressed while the conversational macro screen is displayed. US19W : The screen for the 9” CRT type is displayed on the 14” CRT type. (USER-1 screen) NNUM = 0: When data input control is valid for the CUSTOM screen, the NUM prompt is displayed. = 1: When data input control is valid for the CUSTOM screen, the NUM prompt is not displayed. Bit No. #6

#5

#4

9007

TIDSP

#3

#2

US19WK TIVR2

:

#1

#0

TIVR1

TIDSP

The common conversational macro screen for the 2–path control is specified.

NOTE This setting is validated only for the PATH-2 cassette. Both TTDSP and CNCHG (No. 9006, #4) cannot be set to 1 at the same time.) TIVR1

:

Common conversational macro variables (#10000 to #19999) are specified. (1: For variables #10000 to #19999, areas #10000 to #19999 of the other path are used.) TIVR2 : Common conversational macro variables (#20000 to #29999) are specified. (1: For variables #20000 to #29999, areas #20000 to #29999 of the other path are used.) US19WK= 0 : When display with 12 soft keys is selected, the position of the key–in line is not changed on a window having seven soft keys. = 1 : When display with 12 soft keys is selected, the position of the key–in line is changed on a window having seven soft keys. Address

#7

9008

HRGCC

Bit No. #6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

HCAR

MDLP

AX8CL

AX7CL

AX6CL

AX5CL

AX5CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 5th axis address is made invalid. = 1 : Macro program call by the 5th axis address is made valid. AX6CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 6th axis address is made invalid. = 1 : Macro program call by the 6th axis address is made valid. AX7CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 7th axis address is made invalid. = 1 : Macro program call by the 7th axis address is made valid. AX8CL = 0 : Macro program call by the 8th axis address is made invalid. = 1 : Macro program call by the 8th axis address is made valid. 206

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

MDLP = 0 : A G code to cancel modal calling cannot be used to call a macro to be executed. = 1 : A G code to cancel modal calling can be used to call O9006. MCARG= 0 : In macro calling of G/M codes, P/L/N/G is not argument. = 1 : In macro calling of G/M codes, P/L/N/G is argument. HRGCC = 0 : Does not set the character display screen to brightness modulation mode. = 1 : Sets the character display screen to brightness modulation mode. #7 9009

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

RSRST

RSRST = 0 : When the NC is reset, a conversational macro does not suspends reader/punch control. = 1 : When the NC is reset, a conversational macro suspends reader/punch control. (Completion code #8539 = 12) Address 9010

M code that calls sub-program O9001

9011


9012


9013

G code that calls custom macro O9010

9022

G code that calls custom macro O9019

9023


9032


9033

M code that calls user program

9034

G code that to cancel the modal call

9035

M code calls sub-program O9001

9036

M code calls sub-program O9002

Parameters 9035 and 9036 specify the bit signal of the internal PMC relay (R area) that determines the control mode of the interlock function for a single axis direction. Signal number (0 to 999): Specifies the number of the internal PMC relay (R area). Signal position (0 to 7): Specifies the bit position of the signal. Example) When parameters 9035 and 9036 are set to 900 and 7 respectively The interlock function for a single axial direction is validated when the internal PMC relay (R900, #7) is set to 1 in the JOG or HNDL mode. 207

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Address 9037

Used number of (1/100) of conversational macro exclusive variable

9038

Conversational macro execlusion program at the time of power supply input (CUSTOM screen 1)

9039

Auxility macro execution program number

9040

Conversational macro execution program number at the time of power on

(CUSTOM screen 2)

9041

Conversational macro execution program number at the time of power on

(CUSTOM screen 3)

9042

M code call by area specification, lower limit M code

9043

M code call by area specification, upper limit M code

9044

Used number of extension conversational macro variables

9045

Starting G code in G code calls of ,range specification

9046

Number of G codes in G code calls of ,range specification

9047

Starting O number in G code calls of ,range specification

9048

Distance by which the graphics coordinate system is shifted on the conversational macro screen (in the X direction)

9049

Distance by which the graphics coordinate system is shifted on the conversational macro screen (in the Y direction)

These parameters specify the distance by which the graphics coordinate system is shifted on the conversational macro screen in units of dots. Bit No. Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

9100

MSFT

C9WN

DLMT

VKLM

#3

#2

#1

#0

VGCL

VGAR

VGAR = 0 : The CUSTOM screen is displayed with a background color. = 1 : The CUSTOM screen is not displayed with a background color. VGCL = 0 : The CUSTOM screen is displayed with a background in a background color. = 1 : The CUSTOM screen is not displayed with a background in a background color. (Usually, set 0.) VKLN = 0 : Key–in line background display is performed. = 1 : Key–in line background display is not performed. DLMT = 0 : The range of display with a color background is limited to a data area. = 1 : The range of display with a color background is not limited to a data area. (Usually, set 0.) C9WN = 0 : In a window displayed with seven soft keys, coordinate correction is performed for character display. = 1 : In a window displayed with seven soft keys, coordinate correction is not performed for character display. (Valid only when a background color is provided.) 208

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

MSFT

M. PARAMETERS

= 0 : A soft key frame is not displayed on the CUSTOM screen. = 1 : A soft key frame is displayed on the CUSTOM screen. (Valid only when no background color is provided.)

209

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

M.2.2 Executer Parameter

Bit No. Address

#7

9000

L2R

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

MKG

RSC

EXS

STP

NDP

SQN

SQN = 1 : Displays program number of recorded program and sequence number during execution of a recorded program. = 0 : Displays program number and sequence number of called user program during execution of a recorded program. NDP = 1 : Displays variables for P-CODE program. = 0 : Does not display variables for P-CODE program. STP = 1 : Stops execution of conversational macro program. (”1” is set by break function automatically) = 0 : Execute the conversational macro program. EXS = 1 : Execute macro statement till the next NC statement has come with feed hold, during macro statement execution at execution level. = 0 : Stop if feed hold acts, during macro statement execution at execution level. RSC = 1 : Common variables #100-#149 are cleared to if NC is reset. = 0 : Common variables #100-#149 do not clear to if NC is reset. MKG : Be sure to set to 0. L2R = 1 : Does not display conversational / auxiliary macro and screen during execution macro operation. = 0 : Display conversational / auxiliary macro and screen during execution macro operation. Address 9002

Conversational macro break program number

9003

Conversational macro break sequence number

210

M. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Bit No. Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

9010

MA8

MA7

MA6

MA5

MA4

MA3

MA2

MA1

MA1 = 1 : =0: MA2 = 1 : =0: MA3 = 1 : =0: MA4 = 1 : =0: MA5 = 1 : =0: MA6 = 1 : =0: MA7 = 1 : =0: MA8 = 1 : =0:

Masks a first axis address macro call. Does not mask a first axis address macro call. Masks a second axis address macro call. Does not mask a second axis address macro call. Masks a third axis address macro call. Does not mask a third axis address macro call. Masks a fourth axis address macro call. Does not mask a fourth axis address macro call. Masks a fifth axis address macro call. Does not mask a fifth axis address macro call. Masks a sixth axis address macro call. Does not mask a sixth axis address macro call. Masks a seventh axis address macro call. Does not mask a seventh axis address macro call. Masks an eighth axis address macro call. Does not mask an eighth axis address macro call.

NOTE When compilation parameter bit 4 of No. 9005 (AXCLS) is set to 1, MA1 masks O9031, MA2 masks O9032, MA3 masks O9033, and so on. Bit No. Address

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

9011

#0 MTC

MTC = 1 : Masks a T code execution macro call. = 0 : Does not mask a T code execution macro call.

211

N. Super CAP T/Super CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM

N

APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

Super CAP T/Super CAP II T LOADING TO FLASH ROM

The FANUC Super CAP T is produced by the custom macros and macro executor. The FANUC standard conversational automatic function is also realized by the custom macros. This specification describes the way of compiling the macros and linking and loading the Super CAP T system software into a flash rom module in NC system.

212

B–66102E/10

N.1 SYSTEM INSTALLATION (SETUP)


APPENDIX

Before the system installation, please install a memory card adapter in your personal computer. (1) Installing the FAPT MACRO Compiler System Software Install the the FAPT MACRO compiler system software as follows. 1. Insert the disk marked FAPT MACRO COMPILER SYSTEM v3.1 into the appropriate disk drive. 2. Enter the following command and follow the on–screen instructions: ?: MSETUP (example: B:\MSETUP B: C: ) ?: :The root directory of disk drive. :Specify the name of the disk drive. :Specify the drive name of the hard disk to install the software.

The following directories are created once the installation is complete. \MCOMP

\TOOL \MEX \USR

\TOOL: The FAPT MACRO Compiler system software, batch document files,and so forth are stored. \SAMPLE \MEX : Executor directory \USR : User directory

This specification assumes as follows. B drive : 5 inch floppy disk C drive : hard disk (2) Path Setting Installed software tools are in \MCOMP\TOOL directory. So modify your ”AUTOEXEC.BAT” file to contain the following DOS command entry. example) PATH=C:\MCOMP\TOOL (3) Installing the Macro Executor File Copy the macro executor file from the disk marked MACRO LIBRAY (16TB SCAP) 1/3 to 3/3 *In explanation, ”BH0F” is the series and ”_01” is version for example. Executor files consists of three files, BH0F_01. EX1 BH0F_01. EX2 BH0F_01. EX3 COPY B:BH0F_01. EX1 C:\MCOMP\MEX COPY B:BH0F_01. EX2 C:\MCOMP\MEX COPY B:BH0F_01. EX3 C:\MCOMP\MEX

(4) Installing the Macro Source File. Copy the macro source file from the disk maked MACRO LIBRAY. COPY B:*.SRC C:\MCOMP\USR

213

*.SRC: Macro source file


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

N.2 COMPILING

Command MCOMP0 file–spec (*1) (*1) file–spec : Specify a macro program source. (example) MCOMP0

BH0F_01

The following files are created once the compiling is complete normally. BH0F_01.REL Relocatable file BH0F_01.REF Reference file BH0F_01.LST List file MCOMP0 CAPS_01

The following files are created once the compiling is complete normally. CAPS_01.REL Relocatable file CAPS_01.REF Reference file CAPS_01.LST List file

214

B–66102E/10


APPENDIX

N.3 LINKING

(1) Specifying the File to Link (example) BH0F.LNK CNC = \MCOMP\MEX\BH0F_01.EX1 CNC2 = \MCOMP\MEX\BH0F_01.EX2 CNC3 = \MCOMP\MEX\BH0F_01.EX3 /: P9000 = 10100000 P9001 = 10000001 P9002 = 11000000 P9003 = 10001001 P9007 = 01000000 P9033 = 97 P9037 = 7 P9044 = 2044 /: FILE = \MCOMP\USR\BH0F_01 FILE = \MCOMP\USR\CAPS_01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . /:

Executor file

Compile parameter

Relocatable file (Compiled macro sourceis specified.)

This link file ’BH0F.LNK’ realizes a standard macro function. In case that new macro source is created, add the file name to this link file. (2) Execution of linking Command MLINK file–spec (*3) (*3) file–spec :Specify a link file. (example) MLINK BH0F

The following files are created once the linking is complete normally. BH0F.ROM BH0F.MAP

Rom file Map file

If a link error occurs, the error message is displayed and the linking is aborted.

215


APPENDIX

B–66102E/10

N.4 WRITE TO THE MEMORY CARD

(1) Execution of MMCARD Convert the rom file to memory card file. Command MMCARD file–spec (*4) (*4) file–spec :Specify a rom file. (example) MMCARD BH0F

The following files are created once the ”MMCARD” command is complete normally. BH0F.MEM

Memory card file

(2) Write to Memory Card Write the memory card file ”BH0F.MEM” to a memory card with memory card adapter. For writing, refer to your memory card adapter’s manual. NOTE To write the Super CAP T system software, a 4MByte size card is needed. Both S–RAM type card and F–ROM type card can be used.

216

B–66102E/10

N.5 LOADING TO FLASH ROM MODULE

APPENDIX


According to as follows, load the Super CAP T system software into a flash rom module in NC system. 1. Insert the memory card into the main boad of NC system. 2. Turn on the power with pushing the both softkey key of F10(second on the right) and F11(most right) 3. In SYSTEM MONITOR SERVICE MENU, select ”1.SYSTEM DATA LOADING”. 4. Select ”BH0F.MEM”. 5. Loading to flash rom starts. Select ”END” when the loading is complete. 6. In SYSTEM MONITOR SERVICE MENU, select ”9.END”.

217

Index

B–66102E/10

[A] Alarms, 159, 172

[F] Features, 2

[B]

Flash ROM Transfer End Screen (Except Series 21), 153

Boot Slot Configuration Screen, 124

Flash ROM Transfer Screen (Except Series 21), 152

Boot System (for Series 15–B/15i–A), 173

Free Area in Flash Memory (Series 20), 120

Boot System (for Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 20, 21–B), 97

Functions, 13

BOOT SYSTEM (For Series 16i/18i/21i), 122

[G] [C]

GP–IB Interface Setting (for Sereis 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A), 34

CAP Control Module, 87 Compile Error Code Table, 53

[H]

Compile Parameters, 203, 210 Compile/Link Example, 57

How to View Reference List/Compile List, 36

Compiler Series, 11 Compiling, 214

[I]

Conversion of Table Data with the Macro Linker (Mlink), 83

Installing the Executor File from the FAPT MACRO Library Floppy Disk, 9

Conversion to a Memory Card Format (MMCARD) (This Function is Used in the Series 15–B/16–B/16–C/18–B/18–C/20/21–B/16 i–A/18i–A /21i–A.), 26

Installing the System from the FAPT MACRO Compiler System Floppy Disk, 7 Introduction, 80

Creating Link Files, 92, 95

IPL Menu, 161

Creating Programs, 91, 94 Creating Programs by Using Super Cap II M/Super Cap II T with Series 16i/18i, 84

[L]

Creating Sample User Modules for SUPER CAP II M, 94

Link Control File, 83

Creating Sample User Modules for SUPER CAP II T, 91

Link List File, 83 Linking, 215 Load Basic System Function, 139

[D]

Loading End Menu, 164 Loading End Screen, 149

Determining the Cause of the No–space State, 120

Loading Menu, 163

Developing a User Module, 88

Loading Screen, 148

Development Environment, 86

Loading Start Menu, 163 Loading Start Screen, 147 Loading to Flash ROM Module, 217

[E] End of Boot System, 114

[M]

Equipment Configuration, 5 Error Messages and Required Actions, 115, 140

Macro Compiler (MCOMP0/MCOMP15/MCOMP15i), 14

Executing the User Program, 89 i–1

Index

Macro Converter (MCONV), 81

B–66102E/10

Registering a ROM–format File, Stored on a ROM Cassette, into F–ROM, 184

Macro Converter (MCONV) Operation Guide for the FANUC Series 16/18 Super Cap M/Super Cap II M, 79

Restrictions and Notes on Developing the User Module, 89

Macro Libraries for Developing User Modules, 88

Restrictions Imposed on the System, 90

Macro Linker (MLINK), 17

Rom Write/Verification Parameter Table, 56

Macro Program Input, 24

ROM–Format File Transmitter (CNC) (For Series 16/18/20/21T–A), 21

Macro Program Output, 24

ROM–Format File Transmitter (FANUC FA Writer, GP–IB Interface) (for Series 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A), 25

Memory Card File Delete Screen, 112, 137 Memory Card Format Function, 113, 138

ROM–Format File Transmitter (FANUC PMC Writer/ FANUC FA Writer) (for Series 0, 15–A, 16–A, 18–A), 23

Memory Card Specifications and Restrictions, 175 Menu for end of Transfer of FLASH ROM Memory, 167

RS–232–C Interface Setting, 33

Menu for Transferring Data into FLASH ROM Memory, 166

[S] [N]

Saving a Mem–format File from F–ROM to a Memory Card, 182

Name of Macro Library, 188

Screen Configuration and Operating Procedure, 125

Notes, 155, 168

Selecting a RS–232–C/GPIB Interface Control System (MDEV), 12 Serial Interface Utility, 24

[O]

Series 15i Compile Parameters, 192

Operation, 81

Setting a Macro Password (Series 20), 118

Operation and Corresponding Screens, 100

Setting a Password, 119

Overview, 123

Source File, 81 Specifying a Password for the Series 20 Boot System, 119 Specifying a Temporary File Output Destination (MTMP), 12

[P] P–CODE LOADER FUNCTION (FOR Series 16–B/C, 18–B/C, 21–TA, Series 16i/18i/21i–A), 143

Specifying Environment Variables, 12 SRAM Data Backup Screen, 110, 134

P–code Loader Function (for Series 20), 160

Starting the Boot System, 98, 123, 176

Parameter, 156, 169

Starting the P-code Loader Function, 145

Parameters, 191 Parameters Other than Series 15i, 203

Super CAP T/Super CAP II T Loading to Flash ROM, 212

Password, 118

Symbolic Macro Program, 27

Path Setting, 10

System Common Symbol Definition (\MCOMP\TOOL\SYSTEM.DEF), 39

Processing by P–code Loader Function, 145

System Common Symbol Definition File, 35

Processing Flow for the P–code Loader Function, 162

System Data Check Screen, 104, 129 System Data Delete Screen, 106, 131

[R]

System Data Loading Screen, 101, 126 System Data Save Screen, 108

RAM Initialization Screen, 146

System File and User File, 99

RAM Initializing Menu, 162

System Files and User Files, 124

Registering a Mem–format File, Stored on a Memory Card, into F–rom, 178

System Installation (Setup), 6, 213 i–2

Index

B–66102E/10

[U] User Modules, 88

[T] Table Conversion List File, 82 Table Data File, 82

[W]

Transferring the User Module to F–ROM, 89 Types of Files in F–ROM, 187

Write to the Memory Card, 216

i–3

Jul., 1995

Jan., 1995

Mar., 1994

Mar., 1993

Jul., 1991

Date

05

04

03

02

01

Edition

Addition of Series 20.

Addition of Series 18.

Addition of Series 16–B.

Contents

• Addition of APPENDIX 10 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT WITH MEMORY CARDS (SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTION only for Series 21–TB).

• Addition of Series 21–TB

• Correction of errors.

• Addition of APPENDIX 11 BOOT SYSTEM (For Series 15–B).

• Addition of Series 21–MB.

Edition

06

07

08

09

10

Date

Jan., 1997

Jul., 1997

Sep., 1999

Jul., 2000

Jul., 2001

Contents

Addition of Series 16/18/160/180–MODEL C.

Addition of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i–MODEL A

Addition of Series 15i–MODEL A

Addition of Series 0i–MODEL A

Addition of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i–MODEL B

FAPT MACRO COMPILER(For Personal Computer) PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B–66102E)

Revision Record

Printed at GE Fanuc Automation S.A. , Luxembourg

October 2001

B-66102/EN10 FAPT Macro Compiler for Personal Computer

B-66102/EN10 FAPT Macro Compiler for Personal Computer

Suggest Documents

GFZ-66102E/07, FAPT Macro Compiler Programming ... - CNC Center

A Certifying Compiler for Java - Computer Science

Compiler Support for Persistent Programming - Purdue Computer ...

Qualification Guidelines for Personal Computer

Extending Personal Computer Storages for

FAPT LADDER-III Operator's Manual

Nanos Mercurium: a Research Compiler for OpenMP - Personal - UPC

Tender for supply of Spares for Personal Computer, Computer ...

Compiler Assisted Runtime Adaptation - Computer Engineering ...

CS 132 Compiler Construction - UCLA Computer Science

Compiler Design - Computer Science and Engineering

CSE302: Compiler Design - Computer Science & Engineering

Compiler Construction Exam - Department of Computer and ...

A Semantics-Directed Compiler Generator - Cambridge Computer

Compiler Overview - Department of Computer Science - University ...

Computer Science 332 Compiler Construction Chapter 1 ...

Cassyopia: Compiler Assisted System Optimization - Computer Science

personal-computer-hardware.pdf - Saylor.org

Compiler Technology for Two Novel Computer Architectures - CiteSeerX

TIK.CS02.013.01 Merakit Personal Computer

Compiler and Tool Support for Debugging Object ... - Computer Science

PERSONAL DIVE COMPUTER - Oceanic

A New Verified Compiler Backend for CakeML - Cambridge Computer ...

StreamIt: A Compiler for Streaming Applicationsâ - MIT Computer ...

B-66102/EN10 FAPT Macro Compiler for Personal Computer